JP2021049162A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a speculative property from increasing excessively and reducing a processing load regarding determination as a second predetermined result.SOLUTION: A first identification information correspondence predetermined determination value is set to be within a range differing from a specific numerical value range so as to be a numerical value range continuous from a second reference value differing from a first reference value regardless of a setting value that can be set by setting means, and a second identification information correspondence determination value is set to be within a range differing from a specific numerical value range so as to have a numerical value range common to the first identification information correspondence predetermined determination value as a numerical value range continuous from the second reference value regardless of a setting value that can be set by the setting means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-17

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display of a specific result.

The conventional game machine can execute the variable display, and when the out-of-order symbol (second predetermined result) is displayed as the variable display result, the time saving state (special state), which is an advantageous state for the player, is set. Some are controllable (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, as another game machine, it is possible to control the big hit game state (advantageous state) when the big hit symbol (specific result) is displayed as the variable display result, and any one of a plurality of set values. Is possible, and the rate at which the jackpot symbol (specific result) is displayed as a variable display result differs depending on the set value (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-253794 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, if both the invention described in Patent Document 1 and the invention described in Patent Document 2 are applied to a gaming machine, not only the gambling property may be excessively increased, but also the time saving state when the outlier symbol is displayed is controlled. There is a problem that the processing load related to the determination of whether or not to do is increased.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased, and also to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the second predetermined result. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can play.

The game machine of means 1
As a display result of the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), it is specified as a predetermined result (for example, a missed symbol or a missed symbol with a time reduction). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can display a result (for example, a jackpot symbol) and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display of the specific result. Machine 1)
The specific result can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6) and an unfavorable setting value (for example, 1 to 3) in which the ratio of displaying the specific result is different. The setting means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 10-34) and
A random number value generating means capable of generating a random number value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the game random number update process shown in FIG. 5), and
A determination means capable of determining the display result of the variable display based on the random value generated by the random number value generation means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-46).
Variable display means capable of executing variable display based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, first special symbol display device 182SG004A and second special symbol display device 182SG004B capable of executing variable display of special symbol) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the display result of the variable display as the specific result, and is different from the advantageous state based on the display of the predetermined result as the display result of the variable display. A state control means (for example, CPU 103 shows in FIG. 10-48) which is a state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the start condition of the variable display is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state (for example, the normal state). The part that executes the special symbol stop processing shown) and
With
As a determination value for the determination means to determine the display result of the variable display, a predetermined determination value corresponding to the predetermined result (for example, among the random number values MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the determination corresponding to the time saving omission). Value (missing judgment value with time reduction)) and specific judgment value corresponding to the specific result (for example, judgment value corresponding to big hit (big hit judgment value) among random value MR1 for judgment of special figure display result)
There is
As a determination value for the determination means to determine the display result of the variable display, the first predetermined determination value corresponding to the first predetermined result (for example, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result corresponds to the deviation. A second predetermined judgment value (for example, among the random number values MR1 for determining the special figure display result) including the second predetermined judgment value corresponding to the second predetermined result) There are a specific judgment value corresponding to the specific result (for example, a judgment value corresponding to a big hit (big hit judgment value) among the random number values MR1 for determining the special figure display result). ,
The number of the specific determination values differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the portion where the number of jackpot determination values differs depending on the set value).
The specific determination value is set in a common numerical value range for any of the plurality of set values (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, any set value is used. The part where the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set),
The specific determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set as the specific determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a specific numerical range (for example, FIGS. 10-17 to 10-17 to FIG. It is set to (non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment value shown in 10-20).
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the common numerical range of the jackpot and the common numerical range. The non-common numerical range is the part set in a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020),
As the predetermined determination value, the first identification information corresponding predetermined determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, with a time reduction when the variable special figure is the first special symbol). Loss judgment value) and a predetermined judgment value corresponding to the second identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19, with a time reduction when the variable special figure is the second special symbol). There is an outlier judgment value),
The number of predetermined determination values corresponding to the second identification information is different from the number of predetermined determination values corresponding to the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-19, the variation special figure is the first special figure. The numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value in the case of a symbol is 65317 to 65535, while the numerical range of the time saving deviation judgment value in the case of the second special symbol is 65317 to 65425. part),
The number of the predetermined determination values corresponding to the first identification information is the same for any of the plurality of set values (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the variable special figure is the first special symbol. The numerical range of the time reduction loss judgment value in the case of is 65317 to 65535 regardless of the set value),
The number of the predetermined determination values corresponding to the second identification information is the same for any of the plurality of set values (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19, the variable special figure is the second special symbol. The numerical range of the time reduction loss judgment value in the case of is 65317 to 65425 regardless of the set value),
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the determination means can determine that the display result of the variable display is the predetermined result by using the predetermined determination value corresponding to the first identification information (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-17 and 10-47, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of 65317 to 65535, which is a numerical range out of time saving. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the display result of the variable display is set as the predetermined result by using the predetermined determination value corresponding to the second identification information (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -19 and FIG. 10-47, when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the value of the random number value MR1 is in the range of 65317 to 65425, which is a numerical range out of time saving. It is possible to determine (the part that determines whether or not it is),
The predetermined determination value corresponding to the first identification information is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value different from the first reference value in any of the plurality of set values, and is the specific numerical range. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the out-of-time reduction is set regardless of the set value. However, the part set in the range of 65317 to 65535, which is the reference value for time reduction),
The second identification information correspondence predetermined determination value is a numerical range common to the first identification information correspondence predetermined determination value as a continuous numerical range from the second reference value regardless of any of the plurality of setting values. It is a numerical range including, and is set to a numerical range different from the specific numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19, when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the time reduction is lost. The numerical range of is set in the range of 65317 to 65425, which is the reference value for time reduction, regardless of the set value),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the ratio of the predetermined result controlled in the special state is different, so that the game is enjoyed. On the other hand, in both the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the ratio of the predetermined result controlled to the special state is whichever. Since the ratio is the same even for the set value, it is possible to prevent the gambling from being excessively increased by the set value. Further, the predetermined determination value, which is the number of determination values common to each set value in the case of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of executing the variable display of the second identification information, is continuous from the second reference value. Since it is set in the numerical range, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination that the predetermined result is obtained.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined result includes a first predetermined result (for example, a missed symbol) and a second predetermined result (for example, a missed symbol with a time reduction).
The predetermined determination value is a first predetermined determination value corresponding to setting the display result of the variable display as the first predetermined result (for example, a determination value corresponding to the deviation of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result). ) And the second predetermined determination value corresponding to the display result of the variable display as the second predetermined result (for example, among the random number values MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the determination value corresponding to the time saving deviation (for example) Judgment value with time reduction)), including
The state control means can control the special state based on the determination that the second predetermined result is displayed by the determination means (for example, the special symbol stop process shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. 10-48). The part that executes),
A variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device having a large winning opening) that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is more difficult to enter than the first state. 7)
The second predetermined result is a display result (for example, out of time reduction) in which the variable means does not enter the first state.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the variable means is controlled to a special state without being in the first state, the unexpectedness of the player can be enhanced, and the hobby of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The state control means controls the special state as a first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the specific result is displayed at a higher rate than the first special state. It's possible,
When the determination means is controlled to the second special state, the determination means does not execute the determination to obtain the second predetermined result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-46, the CPU 103 probabilistically changes in step 182SGS559a. It is determined whether or not the flag is set, and if the probability variation flag is set, the process of step 182SGS565 is executed to determine in step 182SGS559b whether or not the variable display result is out of time. The part that is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the second predetermined result being obtained when the game is already controlled to the special state, and the processing load associated with the determination to obtain the second predetermined result. Can be reduced in the second special state.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The state control means controls the special state as a first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the specific result is displayed at a higher rate than the first special state. It's possible,
When it is determined by the determination means that the second predetermined result is to be obtained while being controlled to the second special state, the display result of the variable display is replaced with the second predetermined result and the first predetermined result. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-78 as a modified example, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, even if the variable display result is determined to be out of time saving, it is not controlled to the time saving state as normal out of time. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to a second predetermined result when the game is already controlled to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to the means 3 or the means 4.
The display period of the second predetermined result is shorter in the first special state than when the second predetermined result is displayed in the non-special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B)). , If the variable display result is out of time reduction in the normal state, the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds, but if the variable display result is out of time reduction in the time reduction state, the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the delay due to the extension of the display period of the second predetermined result in the first special state.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to the means 4.
The display period of the second predetermined result is longer than the display period of the first predetermined result (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the symbol determination period is 0. .5 seconds, but if the variable display result is out of time, the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds or 20 seconds),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to being controlled to a special state in a long display period of the second predetermined result, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to the means 6.
A launch target area notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 waits for a special figure shown in FIGS. 10-67) for notifying that the target game area for firing the game medium is a specific area (for example, the right game area 182SG002R). The part that executes the right-handed notification effect by executing
The display period of the second predetermined result is longer than the display period of the specific result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, when the variable display result is out of time, the symbol determination period is 10 seconds or 20 seconds. However, if the variable display result is a big hit, the part where the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds),
The notification by the firing target area notification means is executed in a predetermined period after the display period of the specific result and before the start of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display result. When is a big hit, the right-handed notification effect (the part that executes the right-handed notification effect for hitting) from the timing when 0.5 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the variable display, has elapsed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the player is controlled to the advantageous state, the notification by the firing target area notification means is executed at an earlier timing than when the special state is controlled, so that the player is controlled to the advantageous state. You can quickly recognize this and improve your game interests.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to the means 7.
An effect executing means (for example, an effect) capable of executing a launch target area notification effect (for example, a right-handed notification effect) for notifying that the game area for which the game medium is to be launched is a specific area (for example, the right game area 182SG002R). The part where the control CPU 120 executes the special figure hit waiting process shown in FIGS. 10-46) and
A light emitting means for area notification (for example, right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H) capable of notifying by lighting that the game area of the target for firing the game medium is a specific area is provided.
The state control means controls the special state when the display period of the second predetermined result ends (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-49, the CPU 103 determines the symbol at the timing when the timer out of the symbol determination period timer. , The part where the time saving flag is set if the time saving flag is set),
The area notification light emitting means starts light emission when the display period of the second predetermined result starts (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-67, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect process timer during the symbol determination period. The right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H starts lighting at the timing when it is started), and
The effect executing means can execute the launch target area notification effect during the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 and 10-69, the effect control CPU 120 has a symbol. A part where it is possible to execute a pattern confirmation effect (right-handed notification effect) according to the type of loss with time reduction according to the confirmation period of 20 seconds)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the firing target area notification effect is executed in the display period of the second predetermined result, and the light emitting means for the area notification triggered by the start of the display period of the second predetermined result is directed to a specific area. Since it is possible to encourage the player to launch all the game media in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 7.
An effect executing means (for example, an effect) capable of executing a launch target area notification effect (for example, a right-handed notification effect) for notifying that the game area for which the game medium is to be launched is a specific area (for example, the right game area 182SG002R). The part where the control CPU 120 executes the special figure hit waiting process shown in FIGS. 10-46) and
A light emitting means for area notification (for example, right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H) capable of notifying by lighting that the game area of the target for firing the game medium is a specific area is provided.
The state control means controls the special state when the display period of the second predetermined result ends (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-49, the CPU 103 determines the symbol at the timing when the timer out of the symbol determination period timer. , The part where the time saving flag is set if the time saving flag is set),
The area notification light emitting means starts light emission when the display period of the second predetermined result ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-79 as a modified example, right-handed from the end timing of the right-handed notification effect. The part that starts lighting the notification lamp 182SG009H),
The effect executing means can execute the launch target area notification effect during the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 and 10-69, the effect control CPU 120 has a symbol. A part where it is possible to execute a pattern confirmation effect (right-handed notification effect) according to the type of loss with time reduction according to the confirmation period of 20 seconds)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by executing the launch target area notification effect during the display period of the second predetermined result, the player can be prompted to launch the game medium toward the specific area, and the second predetermined result is displayed. By emitting light from the area notification light emitting means triggered by the end of the period, it is possible to inform the player of the timing at which the game medium is to be launched toward a specific area in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to the means 9.
Variable display compatible display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display FIG. 10) that can display a variable display compatible display (for example, the fourth symbol 182SG005J) that can notify that the variable display is being executed by changing the display mode. The part that executes the fourth symbol variable display process shown in -60) is provided.
The final display mode of the variable display compatible display when the second predetermined result is displayed as the display result of the variable display is the variable display compatible display when the first predetermined result is displayed as the display result of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-61, when the variable display result is out of alignment, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are finally turned off, and the variable display result is shortened. In the case of off, the part where both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are finally lit),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize the case where the display result of the variable display is the first predetermined result and the case where the display result of the variable display is the second predetermined result depending on the final display mode of the variable display compatible display. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to the means 10.
An external signal output means (for example, CPU 103) capable of outputting a second predetermined result signal (for example, three jackpot signals) corresponding to the second predetermined result to the outside of the game machine with the display period of the second predetermined result as an opportunity is shown in FIG. The part that executes the information output processing shown) is provided.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be confirmed outside the game machine that the variable display is controlled to the special state when the display result becomes the second predetermined result.

The means 12 gaming machine is the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 11.
The period controlled by the special state differs between when the second predetermined result is displayed in the non-special state and when the second predetermined result is displayed in the special state (for example, FIG. 10-). As shown in 25, if the variable display result is out of time in the normal state (low base state), any of 10 times, 50 times, 100 times, and 200 times of time saving control is executed. However, if the variable display result is out of time in the time saving state (high base state), the time saving control will continue until it is controlled to the next big hit game state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether the state when the display result of the variable display becomes the second predetermined result is the special state or the non-special state, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 12.
As the second predetermined result, the disadvantageous second predetermined result and the disadvantageous second predetermined result for which the period controlled in the special state is the disadvantaged second predetermined result (for example, the number of variable displays in which the time reduction control is executed is 10 times). Advantageous second predetermined result longer than A) (For example, time saving off B when the number of times of variable display in which time saving control is executed is 50 times, with time saving in which the number of times of variable display in which time saving control is executed is 100 times It has an out-of-time C and an out-of-time D) in which the number of variable displays in which the time-saving control is executed is 200 times.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the display result of the variable display becomes the second predetermined result, the player is made to pay attention to whether the second predetermined result is the second predetermined result or the advantageous second predetermined result. Because it can be done, the game entertainment can be improved.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit, the numerical range of a small hit, and the numerical range of the loss with a time saving in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit, the numerical range of a small hit, and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit, the numerical range of a small hit, and the numerical range of the loss with a time saving in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit, the numerical range of a small hit, and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss type determination table with time saving. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each time saving loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for effect control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of the display contents. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or Shows the change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when recovering from the power failure during the setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the signal which is output in the information output processing. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of 1 jackpot signal, 2 jackpot signals, and 3 jackpot signals. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of a symbol confirmation signal, a prize ball signal, and a security signal. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in the operation of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of a set value and the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the number of executions of a 1st movable body initialization process and a 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 4th symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the stop symbol of the time saving loss. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of a cut-in effect. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in production. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing of the effect executed in each symbol confirmation period. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode during the symbol determination period. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode during the symbol determination period. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit, the numerical range of a small hit, and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 1st special figure in the probability variation state in the modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit, the numerical range of a small hit, and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in the probability variation state in the modification. It is a figure which shows a part of the flowchart of the special symbol normal processing in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode during the symbol determination period in the modification. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of a big hit 3 signal in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probability variation state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probabilistic symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 182SG of This Embodiment)
Next, the feature portion 182SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-7, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 182SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a game board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 182SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 182SG003, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 182SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 182SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 182SG003a, and when the glass door frame 182SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 182SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 182SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 182SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, a first reserved storage display area 182SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 182SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 182SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 182SG005U, a reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the variable display reserved storage number (special figure reserved storage number) corresponding to the special figure game is performed. On the right side of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 182SG005J that can notify that the variable display is being executed and that the variable display result is in a mode different from the decorative symbol or the special symbol is displayed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 182SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right game area 182SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 182SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 182SG002R is the left game area 182SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 182SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down. In particular, in this feature section 182SG, the left game area 182SG002L is a game area in which the game class is flowed down mainly when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state), and the right game area 182SG002R is mainly a game. This is a gaming area in which the game ball flows down when the state is a probability change state (high accuracy high base state), a time saving state (low accuracy high base state), or a big hit game state.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 182SG002L, and in the right game area 182SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 182SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 182SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 182SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 182SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 182SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 182SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-7, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 182SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 182SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 182SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 182SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 182SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 182SG051 and the setting changeover switch 182SG052, is housed in the board case 182SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 182SG051 and the setting changeover switch 182SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 182SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 182SG201.

Since the board case 182SG201 having the lock switch 182SG051 and the setting changeover switch 182SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 182SG003 when the gaming machine frame 182SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 182SG003. Further, since the lock switch 182SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 182SG051. The lock switch 182SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. Although the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 182SG201, a display monitor 182SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 182SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 182SG201. That is, the display monitor 182SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 182SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 182SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 182SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 182SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 182SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st reserved display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Instrument 182SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 182SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 182SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbol hold indicator 182SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 182SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 182SG002R. A game information display unit 182SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 182SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 182SG 133 that lights up in a probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 182SG 134 that lights up in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, game information (signals) is transmitted to the main board 11 via a terminal board (not shown) to an external device such as a management computer of the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. The information output circuit 182SG151 for output is mounted. Further, on the main board 11, a radio wave sensor 182SG161 capable of detecting an illegal radio wave against the pachinko gaming machine 1, a magnetic sensor 182SG162 capable of detecting a magnetic force against the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a vibration sensor 182SG163 capable of detecting vibration against the pachinko gaming machine 1 Various sensors such as are also connected.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification lamp for urging the player to launch a game ball toward the right game area 182SG002R is provided. 182SG009H is provided. The right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H is connected to the lamp control board 14. Therefore, the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H can be controlled to be turned on and off by the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is out of alignment (excluding the omission with time reduction described later) or a small hit, a common combination is used. Variable display results can be derived and displayed.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 182SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 182SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 182SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 182SG004B may overlap.

Further, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is possible to control the high base state (time saving state) after the big hit game is completed, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 182SG, It is possible to control to a high base state after the big hit game, and to control the variable display result to a high base state (time saving state) from the next variable display without going through the big hit game. (Hereinafter, the deviation controlled from the next variable display to the high base state (time reduction state) is referred to as "time reduction loss"). Then, in this feature unit 182SG, four types of time saving loss A to time saving loss D are provided as the types of time saving loss.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when the variable display result is out of time saving, the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B are different depending on the type of time saving out of time. It is possible to derive and display an out-of-time symbol (combination of lit LEDs) as a variable display result.

In addition, in this feature unit 182SG, as shown in FIG. 10-4, if the types of time saving loss are the same, the time saving loss common to the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B. Although a form in which a symbol can be derived and displayed as a variable display result is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display is performed even when the types of time saving and loss are the same. It may be possible to derive and display a different symbol with a time reduction between the device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B as a variable display result.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, the first hold indicator 182SG025A and the second hold indicator 182SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 182SG025A and second hold indicator 182SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold indicator corresponding to the variable display decreases (consumes) in the hold memory in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the section 182SG, the lights are turned off toward the left side).

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, when one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 182SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 182SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the round display 182SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Which segment of the segments constituting the round display 182SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 182SG321 and a second movable body 182SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 182SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 182SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 182SG321 and the second movable body 182SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 182SG322. The origin detection sensor 182SG332, which can detect this, is connected to the origin detection sensor 182SG332.

FIG. 10-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 182SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 182SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the variable display result is "missing", "missing with time reduction", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the decision result (pre-determination result) and the decision result (big hit type determination result) of which of the multiple types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit". Will be done.

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a determination result that the variable display result is "time reduction loss" and the type of the time reduction loss is "time reduction loss A". The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a determination result that the variable display result is "time reduction loss" and the type of the time reduction loss is "time reduction loss B". The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying that the variable display result is "time reduction loss" and the type of the time reduction loss is "time reduction loss C".
The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command to the effect that the variable display result is "out of time saving" and the type of the out of time saving is "out of time saving". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C07H is the eighth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C08H is a ninth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

Command 8FXH stops (confirms) the variable display of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. This is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the symbol confirmation period until the operation is performed. In the symbol confirmation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), different EXT data are set according to the symbol confirmation period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), the command 8F00H is a first symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. The command 8F01H is a second symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command 8F03H is a third symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds.

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 182SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 182SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a set value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-9, in the feature portion 182SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the determination random value MR3, the normal map display result determination random value MR4, and the initial value determination random value MR5 of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 10-10 (A) shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature section 182SG. In this feature unit 182SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case where the display mode is "non-reach" and the case where the variable display mode is "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, among the cases where the variable display result is "out of time reduction", a plurality of variable patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

In this feature unit 182SG, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance as fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the variable display result is "time reduction", that is, the variable display result is "time reduction". The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is "out of time saving", although the embodiment in which the variable display is always executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach is illustrated in the case of "out of attachment". In this case, a case may be provided in which variable display is executed in a variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach.

As shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation pattern, Super Reach α, It is set shorter than Super Reach β. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is "big hit" is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. In, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention. Is not limited to this, and even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the fluctuation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 that is out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

Further, regarding the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 182SG, the symbol determination period from the end (stop) timing of the variable display to the start of the next variable display differs depending on the game state and the variable display result. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), when the variable display result is off and either a big hit or a small hit, the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds (500 ms). When the variable display result is out of time in the normal state (low base state), the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds (20,000 ms). Then, when the variable display result is out of time reduction in the time reduction state (high base state), the symbol determination period is set to 10 seconds (10000ms).

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-26, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns as aspects is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) and the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 10-11 (B). Judgment table (set value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 10-12 (B). (Setting value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (setting) shown in FIG. 10-13 (B). Value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 10-14 (B). ), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -21 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table and small Hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, time reduction loss type judgment table, time reduction deviation pattern judgment table, normal figure display result judgment table (not shown), normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

10-11 (A) to 10-16 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65425 is assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65425 is assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in the normal state or the time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are. It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65425 is assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-14 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65425 is assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65425 is assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", 65317 to 65425 is assigned to "out of time saving", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of time". Has been done. When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot game state when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-16, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is increased according to each set value. Each is different (for example, if the set value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is multiplied. The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is 1.625 times with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5). It may be set to double).

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIG. 10-11 (A), FIG. 10-12 (A), FIG. 10-13 (A), FIG. 10-14 (A), FIG. 10-15 (A), FIG. 10-16 ( As shown in A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIG. 10-11 (B), FIG. 10-12 (B), FIG. 10-13 (B), FIG. 10-14 (B), FIG. 10-15 (B), FIG. 10-16 ( As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit gaming state may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special map display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special map.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result and the time saving state as "out of time saving" is the same in the normal state and the time saving state regardless of the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they become values. Specifically, FIG. 10-11 (A), FIG. 10-12 (A), FIG. 10-13 (A), FIG. 10-14 (A), FIG. 10-15 (A), As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the special figure display result is "with time saving" regardless of the set value. The probability that it is determined to control the time saving state as "out of time" is set to 1/300.

On the other hand, in each of the second special figure display result determination tables, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the time saving state as "out of time saving" regardless of the set value in the normal state and the time saving state. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value. Specifically, FIG. 10-11 (B), FIG. 10-12 (B), FIG. 10-13 (B), FIG. 10-14 (B), FIG. 10-15 (B), FIG. 10-16 ( As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the special figure display result is set as "out of time saving" and the time saving state is set regardless of the set value. The probability of being determined to control is set to 1/600.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is "out of time reduction" regardless of the set value. The determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to be controlled in the time saving state is 0%.

In the feature unit 182SG, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the special figure display result is set to "time saving" by the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. Although the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled in the time saving state is different is illustrated as "out of attachment", the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is not limited to this. , The first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table may have the same probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the time reduction state as "out of time reduction".

In addition, when the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the time saving state in the second special figure display result determination table as "out of time saving" is determined by the first special figure. In the figure display result determination table, the special figure display result may be set higher than the probability determined to be controlled in the time saving state as "out of time saving".
Further, in the present feature unit 182SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is set to "time reduction" in both the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. Although the embodiment in which the probability of being determined to control the time saving state is 0% is illustrated as "out of attachment", the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, the first In at least one of the special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, it may be possible to determine that the special figure display result is controlled to the time reduction state as "out of time reduction".

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit", "small hit", and "missing time reduction" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the gaming state is In the display result judgment table for the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020-1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and 32767 to 32767 to 1346. While up to 33094 is set in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the missed judgment value with time reduction is the range of the big hit judgment value of the previous term set value 6 (1020 to 1346) and the range of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 32767 to In a numerical range different from 33094), 65317 is set as a reference value for time-saving loss (reference value for time-saving loss) in the range of 65317 to 65535, so that the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value is a small hit judgment. It is prevented from overlapping the range of values and the range of jackpot judgment values that change according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-18, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Here, paying attention to the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020-1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and 32767 to 32767 to 1346. While up to 33421 is set in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the missed judgment value with time reduction is the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) and the range of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 32767 to 1346) set in the previous term. In a numerical range different from 33421), 65317 is set as a reference value for time-saving loss (reference value for time-saving loss) in the range of 65317 to 65425, so that the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value is a small hit judgment. It is prevented from overlapping the range of values and the range of jackpot judgment values that change according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probability variation state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with the value 32767 as a reference as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Then, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figure is the same and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value is the same regardless of the set value (with time saving). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the outlier judgment values is the same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value is 219, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is 109. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the time saving loss determination value is set to 65317 as a reference value (time saving loss reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, and when MR1 matches any of the time reduction loss determination values corresponding to the time reduction loss. , Decide to make the special design out of time. That is, the winning of the big hit, the small hit, and the time saving is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) and 10-16 (B) is the probability of a big hit (ratio), the probability of a small hit (ratio), and the probability of being out of time (ratio). Shown. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 182SG004A or the second special symbol display device 182SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 182SG004A or the second special symbol display device 182SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. Furthermore, determining whether or not to make the time reduction out of order means determining whether or not to control the time reduction state (high base state, more accurately, low accuracy and high base state). It also means that it is determined whether or not the stop symbol in the symbol display device 182SG004A or the second special symbol display device 182SG004B is to be an out-of-time symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

10-21 (A) and 10-21 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 10-21 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 10-21 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-22. In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the state shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game. After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed six times (so-called 6 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature section 182SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

That is, in this feature unit 182SG, when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the big hit game of the big hit C is performed when the variable display result is a big hit than when the variable special figure is the first special symbol. The rate of execution is set high.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 (A) and 10-23 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, and 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Assigned.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the variation of the normal reach jackpot is from 1 to 200 in the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-). It is assigned to 3).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. May be good.

FIG. 10-24 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving loss type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type judgment table, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a symbol with a time reduction, the type with a time reduction is changed from A to a time reduction with a time reduction based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. It is a table referred to for determining one of the outliers D.

Here, the type of the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-25. First, if the variable display result is "out of time reduction" when the game state is the normal state (low base state), the time reduction control is executed from the next variable display (the game state is the time reduction state (high base state)). (Controlled by).

At this time, if the time-saving loss type is "time-saving loss A", the special figure game is executed 10 times, or the big hit game state is set before the 10 special figure games are executed. It ends by becoming. In addition, when the time saving loss type is "time saving loss B", the special figure game is executed 50 times, or the big hit game state is reached before the 50 times special figure game is executed. It ends by. In addition, when the time-saving loss type is "time-saving loss C", the special figure game is executed 100 times, or the big hit game state is reached before the 100 special figure games are executed. It ends by. In addition, when the time-saving loss type is "time-saving loss D", the special figure game is executed 200 times, or the big hit game state is reached before the 200 special figure games are executed. It ends by.

Then, when the game state is a time saving state (high base state), that is, when the variable display result is "time saving loss" when the time saving control is already executed, the next variable is performed regardless of the time saving loss type. It is controlled in a time saving state from the display to the control of the big hit game state. That is, in this feature unit 182SG, if the game state is already in the time saving state and the variable display result is "out of time saving", the time saving control at that time is executed regardless of the number of remaining special figure games. Instead, the time saving control will continue until the variable display result becomes a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, in the time saving loss type judgment table, 0 to 119 out of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 199 is the time saving loss A regardless of the fluctuation special chart and the set value. 120 to 209 are assigned to the time-saving loss B, 210 to 269 are assigned to the time-saving loss C, and 270 to 299 are assigned to the time-saving loss D.

In this way, when the variable display result is "out of time reduction" when the game state is the normal state, the number of special figure games in which the time reduction control is executed differs depending on the type of out of time reduction. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the type of time reduction. Furthermore, when the game state is the time saving state and the variable display result is "time saving loss", the time saving control will continue until it is controlled to the big hit game state regardless of the time saving loss type. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is "out of time reduction".

It should be noted that the feature section 182SG exemplifies a mode in which the determination ratio of the time saving type is the same regardless of the set value or the fluctuation special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the set value and the fluctuation special chart, the determination rate of the type of loss with time reduction may be different.

Further, the feature unit 182SG exemplifies a mode in which the random value MR2 for determining the hit type is used to determine the type that is out of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type that is out of time is not limited to this. For the determination, a dedicated random number value for determining the type of time reduction may be used.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation (PA2-2). 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination ratio, so that the variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation is not shortened. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first is the first. The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reservations of the special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the variable display is executed in a fluctuation pattern out of super reach according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

Further, in this feature unit 182SG, a variation pattern determination table for disconnection with a time reduction is also prepared in advance. In the variation pattern determination table for time-saving loss, the fluctuation pattern of super reach α for time-saving loss (PA2-4) and the variation pattern of super reach β for time-saving loss (PA2-5) Therefore, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (E), in the variation pattern determination table for time-saving loss, 1 to 300 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are the variation patterns of super reach α deviation (PA2- It is assigned to 4), and 301 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach β. That is, in the present feature unit 182SG, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β (when the reach effect of the super reach β is executed during the variable display), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α is used. Since the variable display result is out of time with a higher rate than when the variable display is executed (when the reach effect of the super reach α is executed during the variable display), the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α out of line. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β and the deviation pattern of the super reach β was executed.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 182SG150 shown in FIGS. 10-27 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The game control data holding area 182SG150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 182SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 182SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 182SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 182SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes a game control counter setting unit 182SG154 and a game control buffer setting unit 182SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 182SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 182SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 182SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 182SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will occur.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 182SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 182SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 182SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 182SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 182SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 182SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 182SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 182SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 182SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 182SG154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 182SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 182SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 10-28 (A). A data holding area 182SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 182SG190 shown in FIG. 10-28 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 182SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 182SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 182SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 182SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 182SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 182SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 182SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 182SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 182SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 182SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 182SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 182SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 182SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-28 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 182SG194. The reception command buffer 182SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 182SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 182SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 182SG194A in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the hold display flag. 2. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the buffer numbers corresponding to the reserved storage can be stored.

In the hold display flag, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored. , When the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. ) Is set, a hold storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold storage display area 182SG005D and the second hold storage display area 182SG005U, and the variation corresponding to the hold storage display. In the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 182SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 182SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 182SG194A shown in FIG. 10-28 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the effect symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-28 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

In the pre-reading notice setting process in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, and the hold display flag is set. If there is an entry that does not exist, it depends on whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed based on the symbol specification command or variable category command stored corresponding to the entry. The display mode (display pattern) of the hold storage display is determined. When it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold memory display mode is determined from the square (◇) and the star (☆), and when it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the display mode of the hold memory display is decided. Is determined to be white circle. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the hold storage display is set in the hold display flag.

After the hold display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (see FIG. 10-60) so that the hold storage display becomes the first hold storage display area 182SG005D or the second hold storage display area. It will be displayed on 182SG005U.

The feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is limited to this. As the pre-reading notice effect, for example, a background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, an operation effect in which the movable body provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates, and the like are reserved. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the display notice effect.

Next, the display of the display monitor 182SG029 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (A), the display monitor 182SG029 includes a first display unit 182SG029A, a second display unit 182SG029B, a third display unit 182SG029C, and a fourth display unit 182SG029D. The first display unit 182SG029A to the fifth display unit 182SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 182SG029A to the fifth display unit 182SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 182SG029 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 10-29 (B) and 10-29 (C), the display monitor 182SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 182SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 182SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 182SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 182SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 182SG029C and the fourth display unit 182SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 182SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 182SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 182SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 182SG029C and the fourth display unit 182SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 182SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 182SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 182SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 182SG029C and the fourth display unit 182SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 182SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 182SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 182SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 182SG029C and the fourth display unit 182SG029D.

In the display monitor 182SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-31, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 182SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 182SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 182SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 182SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 182SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 182SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko game machine 1 When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 182SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 182SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall can specify the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 182SG029 without executing the setting value changing process described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature section 182SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step 182SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step 182SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (step 182SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (step 182SGsa004; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGsa017, and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (step 182SGSa004; N). 182SGSa003; Y, step 182SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102. (Step 182SGSa005).

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (step 182SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGsa017, and the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (step 182SGsa005; N). In step 182SGSa005; Y), the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. It is determined whether or not (step 182SGSa006). When the setting value changing flag is set (step 182SGsa006; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGsa017, and when the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is executed. If the flag is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (step 182SGSa007), and whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. Is determined (step 182SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (step 182SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to step 182SGSa011 (step 182SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (step 182SGSa008; N), step 182SGSa010 is executed. Proceed to step 182SGSa011 without doing so.

In step 182SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGSa011). When the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 182SG090 is ON (step 182SGSa012). When the release sensor 182SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 182SG051 ON and the game machine frame 182SG003 open (step 182SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step 182SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step 182SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (step 182SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to step 182SGSa013d. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step 182SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (step 182SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step 182SGSa013d.

When the lock switch 182SG051 is OFF (step 182SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (step 182SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGSa013d without executing the processes of steps 182SGsa013a to 182SGSa013c.

In step 182SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not the RAM clear process (step 182SGSa009) is executed). (Step 182SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (step 182SGsa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (step 182SGsa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to step 182SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step 182SGsa013d; N), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step 182SGSa014 without executing the process (step 182SGSa013e).

In step 182SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (step 182SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (step 182SGsa014; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (step 182SGsa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (electric power supply). Performs recovery processing to return to the state at the time of disconnection (step 182SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and in step 182SGSa028. Proceed (step 182SGSa016).

Further, in step 182SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (step 182SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (step 182SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 182SG090 is ON (step 182SGSa019).

When the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 182SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of the employees of the game hall (the game machine frame 182SG003 is opened and the lock switch 182SG051 is turned on, the pachinko machine is operated while operating the clear switch. When the game machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (step 182SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (step 182SGSa021). ). Then, the processes of step 182SGSa009 to step 182SGSa016 described above are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (step 182SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 182SG051 is OFF (step 182SGsa018; N), and when the release sensor 182SG090 is OFF (step 182SGSa019; N), step 182SGSa031 is performed. move on.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (step 182SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step 182SGsa023), and as shown in FIG. 10-38 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 182SG029. The cold start notification is started by starting the blinking of (step 182SGsa024).

After executing step 182SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (step 182SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (step 182SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timered out (step 182SGsa026; N), the processes of step 182SGsa025 and step 182SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timered out (step 182SGsa026; Y), the display monitor The blinking of all segments in 182SG029 is finished (step 182SGsa027), and the process proceeds to step 182SGsa028.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 182SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 182SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 182SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in step 182SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (step 182SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer is interrupted periodically at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The CTC register built into the 100 is set (step 182SGSa029), and interrupts are enabled (step 182SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in step 182SGSa031, the CPU 103 is connected to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. On the other hand, an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (step 182SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (step 182SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (step 182SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (step 182SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (step 182SGSa034; N), the processes of step 182SGsa033 and step 182SGsa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (step 182SGsa034; Y), As shown in FIG. 10-38 (B), the first display unit 182SG029A, No. “E.” is displayed on each of the 2 display unit 182SG029B, the 3rd display unit 182SG029C, and the 4th display unit 182SG029D (step 182SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B (step 182SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the amusement park via a terminal board (not shown) provided in 1 and the process proceeds to step 182SGSa032 (step 182SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 displays by repeatedly executing the processes of steps 182SGSa032-step 182SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). An error occurrence notification is executed by the monitor 182SG029, the first special symbol display device 182SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 182SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-32, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step 182SGSa008 (step 182SGSa008; Y) or set in step 182SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (step 182SGSa009) is executed after clearing the value changing flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In the RAM clear processing, the RAM clear flag is set in step 182SGSa014, not after it is determined in step 182SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (step 182SGSa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag is cleared in step 182SGSa021. It may be executed when it is determined that it is (step 182SGSa014; Y).

FIG. 10-33 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (step 182SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (step 182SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (step 182SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (step 182SGSa043). When the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (step 182SGsa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (step 182SGsa044), and the specified address stores the RAM clear flag (F002). (Step 182SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (step 182SGsa045; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGsa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (step 182SGsa045; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGsa042. Further, the next address is specified, and the process proceeds to step 182SGSa042 (step 182SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (step 182SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

As shown in FIG. 10-33 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) include special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol. The setting value (judgment used setting value) read to set the display result judgment table when the variable display result is judged in the normal processing is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may always be executed, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear process in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

The feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, the accumulator that is the center of the operation, the flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or the general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 10-34 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process (step 182SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B (step 182SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 182SG132 and the first hold display. The flashing of the device 182SG025A and the second hold display device 182SG025B is started (see step 182SGsa052, FIG. 10-39 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 182SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Starts lighting (step 182SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step 182SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. Determine (step 182SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in step 182SGSa020), the address F000 in the RAM 102 is set. Set “1” as the value (reset the set value to “1”) and proceed to step 182SGSa054 (step 182SGSa053b). If any of the values 1 ^ & is stored in the RAM 102 (step 182SGsa053a; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGSa054 without executing the process of step 182SGSa053b.

In step 182SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process execution to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (step 182SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (step 182SGSa056). When the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is not timered out (step 182SGSa056; N), the processes of step 182SGsa055 and step 182SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is timered out (step). 182SGSa056; Y) executes the power failure detection process (step 182SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 182SG029 (step 182SGSa058), via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall (step 182SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (step 182SGsa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 182SG052 is operated (step 182SGsa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 182SG052 (step 182SGsa062; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGSa065. The content of the address F001 is updated (step 182SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 182SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 182SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 182SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 182SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 182SG029 (step 182SGsa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGSa065). ..

When the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGsa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of steps 182SGsa062 to 182SGsa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or to address F001. The process of displaying the set value stored in the display monitor 182SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 182SG051 is OFF in step 182SGSa065 (step 182SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (step 182SGSa066) and sets a value (or a temporary setting value) on the display monitor 182SG029. ) Is finished (step 182SGSa067), and all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B are turned off (step 182SGsa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 182SG132, the first hold indicator 182SG025A and the second hold indicator 182SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 182SG131 (step 182SGsa068, step 182SGsa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step 182SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step 182SGsa069; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step 182SGsa069; Y), the procedure proceeds to step 182SGSa072. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (step 182SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (step 182SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGSa072, and the address F000 in the RAM 102 is reached. When the value of the stored set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (step 182SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is used. It is stored in the address F000 (step 182SGSa071), and the process proceeds to step 182SGSa072. That is, in the process of step 182SGSa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (step 182SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 10-35 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (step 182SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B (step 182SGSa101), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 182SG132 and the first hold display. The flashing of the device 182SG025A and the second hold display device 182SG025B is started (see step 182SGSa102, FIG. 10-39 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 182SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Starts lighting (step 182SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step 182SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start wait timer for waiting until the power cutoff detection process is executed (step 182SGSa104). Step 182SGSa105). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (step 182SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (step 182SGSa107). When the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is not timered out (step 182SGSa107; N), the processes of step 182SGsa106 and step 182SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is timered out (step). 182SGSa107; Y) executes the power failure detection process (step 182SGSa108). The power failure detection process (step 182SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (step 182SGSa057) of the set value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 182SG029 (step 182SGSa109), via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the amusement park (step 182SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGSa111). When the lock switch 182SG051 is ON (step 182SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 182SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of step 182SGSa111. When the lock switch 182SG051 is OFF in step 182SGSa111 (step 182SGsa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 182SG029 is finished (step 182SGsa112), and the first special symbol display device 182SG004A and the second special symbol are displayed. All segments constituting the display device 182SG004B are turned off (step 182SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 182SG132, the first hold indicator 182SG025A and the second hold indicator 182SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 182SG131 (step 182SGsa113, step 182SGsa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (step 182SGSa115), and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 182SG004A, the second special symbol display device 182SG004B, and the round display 182SG131 are turned on, and the first hold indicator 182SG025A, the second By starting blinking of the hold display 182SG025B and the right-handed lamp 182SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., are in the process of changing the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 or the set value. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 182SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which only the LED 1 is lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round indicator 182SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it does not correspond to either B or jackpot C.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (A), at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. As an example, the segment constituting the round display 182SG131 is lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segment constituting the round display 182SG131 is changed in set value. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 182SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame 182SG003 is open. By turning on the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 182SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 182SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 182SG029B, the third display unit 182SG029C, and the fourth display unit 182SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 10-29) is completed. That is, the display monitor 182SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 182SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 182SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 182SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 182SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 182SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 182SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 182SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 182SG003 open. (Clear switch is OFF) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 182SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A), 10-37 (B), and 10-37 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to turn off the first power. The display using the display unit 182SG029A, the second display unit 182SG029B, the third display unit 182SG029C, and the fourth display unit 182SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 10-29) is completed. That is, the display monitor 182SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 182SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 182SG029D ends when the lock switch 182SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 10-36 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (step 182SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (step 182SGS081). If there is no power off signal input (step 182SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (step 182SGS081; Y), backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is included. (Step 182SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 182SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (step 182SGS084), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-40, the CPU 103 performs the same power failure detection process as the above-mentioned steps 182SGSa057 and step 182SGSa108 (step 182SGS200). Is executed, and then S21 to S27 (see FIG. 5) are executed.

Further, in the information output process (see step S23, FIG. 5) in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 can output various signals via the information output circuit 182SG 151 and the terminal board (not shown) described above. There is. As a signal that can be output by the CPU 103 in the information output processing, as shown in FIG. 10-41, a jackpot 1 signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, a jackpot game in progress, or a time saving state (low accuracy high base). 2 jackpot signals indicating that the state or high accuracy and high base state), 3 jackpot signals indicating that the variable display of the time reduction error has stopped (the variable display of the time reduction error has ended), and the variable display of the special symbol A symbol confirmation signal indicating that has stopped, a prize ball signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning of each winning opening, an out indicating the number of game balls won in the winning opening and the number of game balls entering the out opening Signals and security signals indicating that various errors (radio wave error, vibration error, magnetic error, etc.) have occurred are provided.

Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output from the start timing of the jackpot game to the end timing of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (A). When the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit 2 signal ends in a short time state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) from the start timing of the big hit game as shown in FIG. 10-42 (B). If the output is up to the timing (timing controlled to the low accuracy low base state) and the variable display result is out of sync with the time reduction, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (C), the time reduction state (low accuracy high base state). It is a signal that is output from the timing controlled by to the end timing of the time saving state (the timing controlled to the low accuracy and low base state). As shown in FIGS. 10-42 (B) and 10-42 (C), the jackpot 2 signal is a jackpot game based on the variable display when the variable display result is a jackpot during the time saving state. Since it is continuously output even in the middle and the time saving state based on the big hit game, it is also called a continuous villa signal.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (D), the jackpot 3 signal is output for 10 seconds or 20 seconds from the stop timing of the variable display with the time reduction to the end of the symbol confirmation period of the variable display. It is a signal.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (A), the symbol confirmation signal is a pulse signal output at the stop timing of the variable display even when any of the variable display results is shown in FIG. 10-43 (B). As shown, the prize ball signal is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of each winning opening (the total number of prize balls that counts the number of prize balls paid out from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). This is a pulse signal that is output when the counter value) increases by 10 balls. As shown in FIG. 10-43 (C), the out signal is the sum of the game ball that has won the winning opening and the game ball that has entered the out opening (the winning or out opening to the winning opening from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). This is a pulse signal output at the timing when the number of out-number counters, which counts the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the approach to the pachinko game machine 1, is increased by 10. As shown in FIG. 10-43 (D), the security signal is the timing at which an illegal radio wave is detected for the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the radio wave sensor 182SG161 (timing at which a radio wave error occurs), and the security signal for the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the magnetic sensor 182SG162. Output at a predetermined error occurrence timing such as the timing when an illegal magnetism is detected (the timing when a magnetic error occurs) and the timing when an illegal vibration is detected for the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the vibration sensor 182SG163 (the timing when an illegal vibration occurs). It is a pulse signal to be generated.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 182SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-44. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step 182SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step 182SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved, which is the number of reserved special figures games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step 182SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 182SG154. When the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value in step 182SGS502 (step 182SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 182SG155 is set to "1" (step 182SGS502; Step 182 SGS503).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 182SGS501a (step 182SGS501a; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 182SGS502 (step 182SGS502; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step). 182SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 182SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step 182SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 182SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 182SGS505 (step 182SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 182SG155 is set to "2" (step 182SGS505; N). Step 182 SGS506).

After executing any of the processes of step 182SGS503 and step 182SGS506, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 182SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 182SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 182SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 182SGS508, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 182SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and specified (step 182SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 182SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random value MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 182SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time, and also extracts numerical data indicating all of them. It is specified to determine the variable display result in the variable display result determination module (step 182SGS525) described later.

Following the process of step 182SGS510, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 182SGS511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 182 SGS 511, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 182 SGS 512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 182 SGS 513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 182SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 182SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 182SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 182SGS515), and then the process of step 182SGS504 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 182SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 182SGS516), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-45 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 182 SGS 512 of FIG. 10-44 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 182SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal process (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIG. 10-46) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 182SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. I do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 182SG152, and the pachinko game. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (step 182SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state. The probability variation flag is a flag that is turned on when the CPU 103 executes the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 6) and the type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B or jackpot C.

Following the process of step 182 SGS 521, the CPU 103 refers to the start address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 10-33 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step 182 SGS 522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (step 182SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (step 182SGS525) shown in FIGS. 10-47, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-47, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (step 182SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 182SGS571). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 182SGS572 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step 182SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the variable display (step 182SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined in step 182SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 182SGS572; N), the small hit in the set special figure display result determination table. The numerical range of the hit judgment value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment (step 182SGS573), and the special figure display result judgment extracted in step 182SGS509 of FIG. 10-44 is performed. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 of the above is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 182SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 182SGS574; Y), it is determined that the numerical data is a small hit in the variable display (step 182SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined in step 182SGS574 that the small hit is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (step 182SGS574; N), is the gaming state in the probabilistic state? It is determined whether or not (step 182SGS574a). When the gaming state is a probabilistic state (step 182SGS574a; Y), it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (step 182SGS575).

Further, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the probability variation state, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state (step 182SGS574a; N), the set special figure display result determination is made. The special figure extracted in step 182SGS509 of FIG. 10-44 by comparing the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value in the table with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (step 182SGS574b). It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is within the determination range of the predetermined time reduction deviation (step 182SGS574c).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not within the determination range, that is, if it is determined that the time reduction is not out of the variable display (step 182SGS574c; N), the variable display result is determined to be out of range (step 182SGS75). ). Further, when it is determined that the time reduction is out of the judgment range, that is, when it is determined that the time reduction is out of the variable display (step 182SGS574c; Y), the variable display result is determined to be the time reduction deviation. (Step 182 SGS74d).

Returning to FIG. 10-45 (A), it is confirmed in step 182SGS525 whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display (step 182SGS526), and if it is determined not to be a big hit (step 182SGS526; N), step 182SGS525 In the variable display, it is confirmed whether or not a small hit is determined (step 182SGS527), and when it is determined that a small hit is not obtained (step 182SGS527; N), whether or not the probability variation flag is set, that is, It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (step 182SGS527a).

If the probability change flag is set (step 182SGS527a; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGS527c, and if the probability change flag is not set (step 182SGS527a; N), the time reduction is lost in the variable display in step 182SGS525. It is confirmed whether or not the determination is made (step 182SGS527b). If it is not determined in step 182SGS525 that the variable display is out of time (step 182SGS527b; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS527c.

In step 182SGS572c, the effect control CPU 120 executes the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "missing" (step 182SGS527a), and is the time reduction flag set? Whether or not, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state is determined (step 182SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set in step 182SGS528 (step 182SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (step 182SGS529), and if the time saving flag is set (step 182SGS528). Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 182SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 182SG, in addition to these deviation pattern determination tables A and deviation pattern determination tables D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10-26, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. In the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the non-reach fluctuation pattern, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2. When the set value is 3, 1-410 is assigned, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for non-reach variation patterns, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for dynamic pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in step 182 SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations change the number of reserved memories after the determination. However, since the fluctuation pattern is always non-reach or super reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D in the determination at the start winning. There is.

Further, when it is determined in step 182SGS527b that the time reduction is lost in the variable display (step 182SGS527b; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction loss type determination table. The type of loss with time reduction is determined (step 182SGS527d).

In addition, a symbol specification command according to the determined time-saving loss type, that is, a second symbol specification command when the time-saving loss A is used, and a third symbol specification command when the time-saving loss B is used. If it is C, the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command is executed, and if it is D, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command is executed (step 182SGS527e). As a table, a variation pattern determination table for loss with time reduction is selected and set (step 182SGS527f), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS536.

When it is determined in step 182SGS526 that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (step 182SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (step 182SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a sixth symbol designation command when the jackpot A is a jackpot B, a seventh symbol designation command when the jackpot B is a jackpot B, and a eighth symbol designation command when the jackpot C is a jackpot C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (step 182SGS534), and then, as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern, a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type is selected and set (step 182SGS535). Step 182 SGS536.

If it is determined in step 182SGS527 that a small hit will occur in the variable display (step 182SGS527; Y), the ninth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit", The transmission setting is executed (step 182SGS531), the variation pattern determination table for small hits is selected and set (step 182SGS532), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS536.

After executing any of the processes of step SGS527f, step 182SGS529, step 182SGS530, step 182SGS5322, and step 182SGS535, a numerical value indicating each fluctuation pattern judgment table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Using the data, the variation category according to the range of the determination values including the random value MR3 is determined (step 182SGS536). In this feature section 182SG, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off (including out-of-time)", it is common to "non-holding" regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a "variable display mode (for example, normal reach or small hit) other than" non-reach "and" super reach "). It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 by providing the fluctuation category of “Other”.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 182 SGS 536 to the effect control board 12 is made (step 182 SGS 537), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

10-46 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 10-46, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is "0" (step 182SGS541). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 182SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 182SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 182SGS541 (step 182SGS541; N), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 182SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (step 182SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 182 SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151B is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 182SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 182SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 182SGS544), the process proceeds to step 182SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 182SGS541 (step 182SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 182SGS545). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 182SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 182SG154 reads out the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Just do it. As described above, the process of step 182SGS545 is executed when it is determined in step 182SGS541 that the number of stored second special figures is "0", and the number of stored first special figures is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 182SGS545 (step 182SGS545; N), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (step 182SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 182 SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. At the same time, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 182SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 182SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 182SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 182SGS548), the process proceeds to step 182SGS549.

In step 182SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 182SG152 or the like (step 182SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the process of step 182SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 10-33 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step 182SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 10-33 (B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (step 182SGS551). When it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (step 182 SGS551: Y), the set value specified in step 182 SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (step 182 SGS552) to identify. It is determined whether or not the set value set and the stored determination used set value are the same (step 182SGS553).

If it is determined in step 182 SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (step 182 SGS553: N), an error is specified for the effect control board 12 according to the abnormality of the set value. While making settings for transmitting commands (step 182SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a game hall management computer via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (step). 182SGS555), the loop processing is started. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display and the current start address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of Machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature section 182SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 performs processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball wins at each winning opening. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 182SG, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display monitor 182SG029, the first special symbol display device 182SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 182SG004B are shown in FIGS. The abnormality may be notified to a player, a clerk of a game hall, or the like by using a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in B) or FIG. 10-39 (B).

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 182SG, if the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. Although the embodiment in which the security signal is output to the field management device only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these error specification commands are transmitted and the security signal is output. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned non-gaming state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 182SG, if the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 performs a pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state, for example, the game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this). By setting 1) in the feature portion 182SG of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in step 182SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and executes the first variable display (step 182SGS551: N) or specified in step 182SGS553. If it is determined that the set value and the stored determination used set value are the same (step 182SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination according to the current gaming state, the start port buffer value, and the set value. Select and set the table (step 182SGS556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in step 182SGS525 shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), that is, the processing of steps 182SGS571 to 182SGS557 shown in FIG. 10-47 is performed (step 182SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed in step 182SGS557 whether or not it is determined that the variable display is a big hit (step 182SGS558), and if it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (step 182SGS558; N), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit in step 182SGS557. It is confirmed whether or not it has been done (step 182 SGS559).

When it is determined in step 182SGS558 that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (step 182SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 182SG152 is set to the ON state (step 182SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 10-21 (A) and 10-21 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 182SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "big hit A" and "big hit B" in the jackpot type determination table. , It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "big hit C" is matched (step 182SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 182SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 182SG155 (step 182SGS564), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", it may be set to "1", if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "2", and if it is "big hit C", it may be set to "3". After the execution of step 182SGS564, the process proceeds to step 182SGS565.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 182SGS559 that a small hit will occur in the variable display (step 182SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGS560, and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 182SG152 is set to the ON state. (Step 182SGS560), the process proceeds to step 182SGS565.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in step 182SGS559 that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (step 182SGS559; N), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 182SGS559a). When the probability change flag is set (step 182SGS559a; Y), it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment and the process proceeds to step 182SGS565. When the probability change flag is not set (step 182SGS559b; N), the time is shortened in the variable display. It is determined whether or not the attachment is off (step 182SGS559b).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not lost (step 182SGS559b; N), it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved, the process proceeds to step 182SGS565, and if it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved in the variable display (step 182SGS559b; Y), The time saving flag set in the game control flag setting unit 182SG152 is set to the ON state (step 182SGS559c).

At this time, the time-saving loss type determination table shown in FIG. 10-24 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of types of time-saving loss type (step 182SGS559d). By referring to the time-saving loss type judgment table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment stored in the variable random number buffer and the time-saving loss type judgment table "Time-saving loss A" , "Random number with time reduction B", "Random number with time reduction C", and "Random number with time reduction D". Which of the types is used is determined (step 182SGS559d).

Corresponding to the time saving loss type determined in this way, for example, by setting the time saving loss type buffer value which is the stored value of the time saving loss type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 182SG155 (step 182SGS559f). , Memorize the determined loss type with time reduction. As an example, if the type of time-saving loss is "time-saving loss A", it is set to "1", if it is "time-saving loss B", it is set to "2", and if it is "time saving loss C", it is set to "3". If it is "out of time D", it may be set to "4". After the execution of step 182SGS559f, the process proceeds to step 182SGS565.

In step 182 SGS565, whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set). ) Predetermined result, whether to control to the time saving state based on the time saving loss (whether the time saving flag is set), and the big hit type in the case of the big hit game state The fixed special symbol is set to any of the ones shown in FIG. 10-4 according to the determination result of the time saving type and the time saving state. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 182SGS565, the set value specified in step 182SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (step 182SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is used for the variation pattern setting process. After updating to the corresponding value "1" (step 182SGS567), the special symbol normal processing ends.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 182SGS545 (step 182SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 182SGS568), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment stores the determined used setting value as one of the game information in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 10-33 (B)), the pachinko game machine 1 is set to cold start. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the judgment used setting is illustrated, although the mode in which the judgment used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is executed is illustrated. By storing the value in the area that has not been cleared by the RAM clear processing in the RAM 102, the judgment used set value and the RAM 102 are determined when the first variable display is executed even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start. It may be possible to compare the set values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the first address of.

In addition, in the feature unit 182SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-45 and 10-46, a mode in which a variable display result is determined by using a variable display result determination module that executes a common process is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. When the process for comparison (steps 182 SGS551 to 182 SGS553 shown in FIGS. 10-46) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. (Step 182SGS554 to step 182SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

10-48 and 10-49 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing executed by the CPU 103. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer, which will be described later, is operating (step 182SGS600). When the symbol determination period timer is not operating (step 182SGS600; N), the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed (step 182SGS601). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 182SGS602).

When the jackpot flag is set (step 182SGS602; Y), if the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set, these flags are cleared (off state) (step 182SGS003). In addition, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 182SGS604). For example, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the transmission setting of the hit start 1 designated command is set, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, the transmission setting of the hit start 2 designated command is set, and when the jackpot type is jackpot C. Starts hitting 3 Sets the transmission of the specified command.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the game state designation command indicating the normal state (step 182SGS605), and during the period (0.5 seconds) from the end of the variable display on the symbol confirmation period timer to the start of the jackpot game. Set the corresponding value (step 182SGS606). Then, the transmission setting of the first symbol confirmation command corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is performed (step 182SGS607), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the big hit flag is not set in step 182SGS602 (step 182SGS602; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 182SGS608). When the small hit flag is set (step 182SGS608; Y), the transmission setting of the hit start designation command (hit start 4 designation command) corresponding to the small hit is performed (step 182SGS610). Further, a value corresponding to the period (0.5 seconds) from the end of the variable display to the start of the small hit game is set in the symbol determination period timer (step 182SGS610). Then, the transmission setting of the first symbol confirmation command corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is set (step 182SGS611), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS618.

When the small hit flag is not set in step 182SGS608 (step 182SGS608; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving loss flag is set (step 182SGS612). When the time saving flag is set (step 182SGS612; Y), it is further determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (step 182SGS613).

When the time reduction flag is not set, that is, when the variable display result is out of time reduction when the game state is in the low base state (step 182SGS613; N), the variable display ends in the symbol confirmation period timer. A value is set according to the period (20 seconds) from the time until the start of the next variable display (step 182SGS614). Then, the transmission setting of the third symbol confirmation command corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds is set (step 182SGS615), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS625.

Further, when the time reduction flag is set, that is, when the variable display result is out of time reduction when the game state is in the high base state (step 182SGS613; Y), the variable display is displayed on the symbol confirmation period timer. A value is set according to the period (10 seconds) from the end to the start of the next variable display (step 182SGS616). Then, the transmission setting of the second symbol confirmation command corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds is set (step 182SGS617), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS615. If the time saving loss flag is not set in step 182SGS612 (step 182SGS612; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS618.

In step 182SGS618, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step 182SGS618). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step 182SGS618; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGS625, and when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step 182SGS618; N), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 182SGS619), it is determined again whether or not the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 182SGS620). If the time reduction counter value is not 0 (step 182SGS620; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS625, and if the time reduction counter value is 0 (step 182SGS620; Y), the time reduction flag is cleared (off). (Step 182SGS621), and the right-handed lamp 182SGS132 is turned off (step 182SGS622).

Further, a value corresponding to the period (0.5 seconds) from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display is set in the symbol confirmation period timer (step 182SGS623). Then, the transmission setting of the first symbol confirmation command corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is set (step 182SGS624), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS625.

In step 182 SGS 625, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the allegorical state specification command according to the state of the time saving flag (step 182 SGS 625), and ends the special symbol stop process.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period timer is operating in step 182SGS600 (step 182SGS600; Y), the CPU 103 sets the value of the symbol confirmation period timer to -1 (step 182SGS621), and whether or not the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out. (Step 182 SGS622).

If the symbol confirmation period timer is not timered out (step 182SGS622; N), the special symbol stop processing is completed, and if the symbol confirmation period timer is timered out (step 182SGS622; Y), is the jackpot flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step 182 SGS623). When the jackpot flag is set (step 182SGS623; Y), the jackpot display time timer is set (step 182SGS624), and the number of opening times (number of rounds) of the jackpot according to the jackpot type is set in the opening count counter. (Step 182 SGS625).

If the right-handed lamp 182SG132 is not lit, the right-handed lamp 182SG132 is started to light (step 182SGS626). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the big hit flag is not set in step 182SGS623 (step 182SGS623; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 182SGS628). When the small hit flag is set (step 182SGS628; Y), the small hit display time timer is set (step 182SGS629), and the number of times the large winning opening is opened according to the small hit is set in the opening number counter. Set (step 182 SGS630). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the small hit flag is not set in step 182SGS628 (step 182SGS628; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving loss flag is set (step 182SGS632). If the time reduction flag is not set (step 182SGS632; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS636, and if the time reduction flag is set (step 182SGS632; Y), the time reduction flag is set (step 182SGS633). If the right-handed lamp 182SG132 is not lit, the right-handed lamp 182SG132 is started to light (182SGS635), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS636.

Then, in step 182SGS636, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 182SGS636), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening preprocessing executed by CUP 103. In the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the round start waiting timer indicating the period until the start timing of the next round game is operating (step 182SGS641). When the round start waiting timer is not set (step 182SGS641; N), it is further determined whether or not the big hit pre-start timer indicating the period until the start of the first round of the big hit game is operating (step 182SGS642). ). When the jackpot start pre-timer is not in operation (step 182SGS642; N), the jackpot start wait process is terminated by setting a value corresponding to a predetermined period in the jackpot start pre-timer (step 182SGS643).

When the big hit pre-start timer is operating (step 182SGS642; Y), the value of the big hit pre-start timer is set to -1 (step 182SGS645), and whether the big hit pre-start timer with the value set to -1 has timed out. It is determined whether or not (step 182SGS646). If the pre-big hit timer has not timered out (step 182SGS646; N), the jackpot release pre-processing is finished, and if the pre-big hit timer has timered out (step 182SGS646; Y), the hit according to the jackpot type. The transmission setting of the start designation command is set (step 182SGS647), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS650.

When the round start waiting timer is set (step 182SGS641; Y), the CPU 103 sets the value of the round start waiting timer to -1 (step 182SGS648), and the round start waiting timer with the value set to -1 is timered out. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step 182 SGS649). If the round start waiting timer is not timered out (step 182SGS649; N), the jackpot release preprocessing is completed, and if the round start waiting timer is timered out (step 182SGS649; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGS650.

In step 182 SGS650, the CPU 103 sets the maximum opening time of the big winning opening to a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds). Then, the opening of the large winning opening is set (step 182SGS651), and the transmission setting of the designated command during opening of the large winning opening is set according to the round (step 182SGS652). In addition, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the jackpot opening (step 182SGS653), and the jackpot opening preprocessing is terminated.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 10-51 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step 182 SGS401) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / counter /) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the timer circuit).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 182SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is set to -1 (step 182SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (step 182SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer times out (step 182SGS405; N), the processes of step 182SGS404 and step 182SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer goes out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (step 182SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (step 182SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (step 182SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the game in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the person information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (step 182SGS407), and the process proceeds to step 182SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (step 182SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (step 182SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (step 182SGS408; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). , Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (step 182SGS409), the information stored in the RAM 102 was cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 were cleared. The RAM clear notification process for notifying (executing the RAM clear notification) is executed (step 182SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image in the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk at the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 after displaying the notification image 182SG005M1) that notifies the fact, emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to step 182SGS427.

If the cold start notification command is not received (step 182SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (step 182SGS411). ). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (step 182SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. Execute the set value related notification process for executing the notification that the change operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) (step 182SGS412). ..

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-58 (B) and 10-58 (C), the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change and a notification during setting value confirmation. , The notification image 182SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 182SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Generally, the game machine frame 182SG003 is open, and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 182SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of a game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot determine from the display of the image display device 5 whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during setting value change and the notification during confirmation of set value, the pachinko game machine is sent to the clerk of the game hall who changes or confirms the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 includes a first movable body initialization process (step 182SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 182SG321 and a second movable body initializing process for checking the operation of the second movable body 182SG322. The conversion process (step 182SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 182SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 182SG321 is completed. It is designed to be executed (see FIGS. 10-57).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-55 and 10-56. FIG. 10-55 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, and FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control at the time of non-detection.

The first movable body 182SG321 and the second movable body 182SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between the origin position (first position) and the effect position (second position), respectively, and are provided from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 182SG321 and the second movable body 182SG322 during variable display and the like.

The effect control CPU 120 is movable when the detected portion of the movable body 182SG321, 182SG322 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 182SG331, 182SG332 when the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is executed. When the bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the game island, or when the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the motor is removed. Movable body 182SG321,182SG322 has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine due to a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the origin return of the movable body 182SG321, 182SG322 cannot be confirmed or it cannot operate due to a key, failure, or catching. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the coalescing position such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. 10-34), the origin is returned. Execute non-detection operation control for. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 in the origin position direction.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 182SG321, 182SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 182SG331 and 182SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 10-56 (A) and 10-56 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322, and are the control speeds set for operating the movable bodies 182SG321. , 182SG 322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating a predetermined movable body 182SG321, 182SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section. Movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 when the mode is different between the moving section and other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the moving section rises and falls even in the same moving section. The operating speed when the is actually operated may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322, each movable body 182SG321 , 182SG322's actual operating speeds are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 182SG321 and 182SG322, the size and weight of each movable body 182SG321 and 182SG322, When there are differences in the operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 10-56 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the set actual operation confirmation process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. The movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are operated based on the control speed set in the above. Specifically, it controls to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 182SG 321 and 182 SG 322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 182 SG 321 and 182 SG 322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change in the order of high speed → low speed. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect using each movable body 182SG321, 182SG322, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 182SG321 and 182SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of, even when the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed are higher than the minimum speed. The movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322, and the control speeds are controlled so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, they operate at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as operating.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 182SG3211 is controlled so as to be the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when the object is stopped at the effect position. After the 182SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 182SG331 and 182SG332.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control, it is moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the feature unit 182SG of the form, the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always obtained so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Controls the operation of the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 182SG321 and 182SG322 are located near the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When the movable body 182SG321,182SG322 returns to the origin position, the origin detection sensor 182SG331, 182SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected part, or it can move from a short distance when it is operated at the control speed when accelerating, that is, at high speed. Since there is a risk that the movable body 182SG321, 182SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the body 182SG321, 182SG322 returns to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable body 182SG321, 182SG322, etc. may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 10-51, after executing the first movable body initialization process (step 182SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (step 182SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 is performing the operation check of the first movable body 182SG321. It is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed is set (step 182 SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (step 182SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (step 182SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (step 182SGS416; N) Proceed to step 182SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (step 182SGS416). Y) proceeds to step 182 SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (step 182SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGS417 without executing the process of step 182SGS416.

In step 182SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 182SG321 is completed (step 182SGS417). If the initialization of the first movable body 182SG321 has not been completed (step 182SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 182SG412 (step 182SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 182SG321 is completed. If this is the case (step 182SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 182SG322 has been completed (step 182SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 182SG322 is not completed (step 182SGS419; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 182SG322 is completed (step 182SGS419; Y), the set value is set. It is determined whether or not the early change end flag is set (step 182SGS420).

When the set value early change end flag is set in step 182 SGS 420 (step 182 SGS 420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (step 182 SGS 421), and the first movable body initialization which is the same process as step 182 SGS 413 is performed. The process (step 182 SGS 422) and the second movable body initialization process (step 182 SGS 423), which is the same process as step 182 SGS 414, are executed, and these first movable body initialization processes (step 182 SGS 422), step 182 SGS 414, and the second movable body initial stage are executed. In the conversion process (step 182SGS423), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 182SG321 and the second movable body 182SG322 is completed (step 182SGS424). If the initialization of the first movable body 182SG321 and the second movable body 182SG322 is not completed (step 182SGS424; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 182SG321 and the second movable body 182SG322 is completed. If yes (step 182SGS424; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 182SG412 to 182SG424, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started. To execute. As described above, in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 182SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 182SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When it is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 182SG321 and the second movable body 182SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second The movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (B), of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 182SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 182SG322 is still completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence state, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization process is not yet completed. In other words, if the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed before the operation check of the first movable body 182SG321 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initial stage that are being executed are completed. Only the conversion process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

If the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command are not received in step 182SGS411 (step 182SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error designation command is received (step 182SGS411; N). Step 182 SGS425). When the error designation command is received (step 182SGS425; Y), the error notification process (step 182SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (step 182SGS425;). N) proceeds to step 182 SGS403.

As the error notification in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (D), if the image display device 5 displays the notification image 182SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. Good. By displaying the notification image 182SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can determine that an invalid value is set as a set value from the notification image 182SG005M4. , The power was turned on again in the pachinko game machine 1 in a state where a power failure occurred while changing the set value, and the set value (judgment used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the start address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that the set value is different from the set value. In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the error notification process (step 182SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the error notification process (step 182SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko game machine 1 is completed. ), And there are two error notification processes.

Of these, regarding the error notification process (step 182SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the error that occurred when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (CPU 103 is the game control main process step 182SGSa031 shown in FIG. 10-32). The notification image 182SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted in the processing), and the error notification processing (step 182SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed is the pachinko. Notification image on the image display device 5 based on an error that occurred after the start-up of the gaming machine 1 was completed (reception of an error designation command transmitted by the CPU 103 in the process of step 182 SGS554 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 10-46). 182SG005M4 may be displayed.

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-52, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information). While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since the input of ) And the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated and stored).

That is, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

Then, in step 182 SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 performs the effect. Start displaying the initial symbol according to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-53, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. When set, the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when it is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 10-51, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (step 182SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step 182SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (step 182SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes an activation notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated (step 182SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify the above The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the start notification process is executed in the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko game machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the activation notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different depending on the presence.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-54, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko game machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the output sound A is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated and the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Output of the output sound C of the above, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) for 40 seconds is executed on the image display device 5. Although the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

The feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by providing the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a game hall management computer or a counter for each machine. A signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as an activation notification at the time of the activation.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, a part of the device that executes the start notification is common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 is used. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 182SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output from only some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 182SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko game machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which it is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, set value confirmation end notification command, and set value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, activation notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the player is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-51, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (step 182SGS432). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 10-59, the effect control CPU 120 first receives an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (step 182 SGS441). If there is no power off signal input (step 182SGS441; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (step 182SGS441; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are stored. The backup data including the above is specified (step 182SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 182SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (step 182SGS444), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 10-51, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step 182SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 10-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (step 182 SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process (step 182SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, and a player information input process for accepting the input of player information (step 182SGS436). , The player information output process (step 182SGS437) for outputting the player information, the effect information aggregation process (step 182SGS438) for aggregating the effect information, and the error notification process (step 182SGS439) are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server to perform the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variable display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. To do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the CPU 103. If an error designation command has been received, error notification is executed according to the received error designation command.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature section 182SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-60, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (step 182 SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (step 182SGS451; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), the first hold storage display area 182SG005D and the second hold storage display area 182SG005U are displayed. The hold display update process (step 182SGS454), which updates the display number of hold storage displays and the display mode of the hold storage display according to the number of hold storages stored in the start winning command buffer 182SG194A and the value of the hold display flag. 4th symbol variable display process (step 182SGS455) that executes variable display of the 4th symbol 182SGS005J according to the variable display of decorative symbols and special symbols, and the number of remaining time reduction control times in the time reduction state (low accuracy high base state) After executing the remaining time reduction number display process (step 182 SGS456) to be displayed in 5, any of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is any of "1" to "4" (step 182SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (step 182SGS451; N). Step 182 SGS452). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (step 182SGS452; N), the hold display update process (step 182SGS454) is executed and the effect control process flag is set. When any of the processes of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (step 182 SGS452; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is set to -1 (see FIG. 7). Step 182 SGS453) and the hold display update process (step 182SGS454) are executed, and any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processes of steps 182SGS451 to 182SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times. There is.

In the feature unit 182SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the pachinko game machine 1 is variablely displayed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 6), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As shown in FIGS. 10-61, the fourth symbol in the feature portion 182SG has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb. The effect control CPU 120 executes the second symbol variable display process (step 182SGS455) to alternately light the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb at regular intervals to display the decorative symbol or special symbol in a variable manner. It is designed to show that it is inside. Further, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is out of alignment by executing the fourth symbol variable display process. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a big hit, a small hit, or a time saving loss, both are turned on at the end timing of the variable display.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the display result determination table. Regardless of this, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), it corresponds to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place within the range of 0 to 65535 with 1020 as the reference value, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where the random value is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is obtained regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-46, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). While reading the set value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value are set (the display result judgment table according to the set value is set), and the jackpot game state is set. Determine whether to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, a set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read set value. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time and the judgment used setting value do not match as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-58), it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading an inappropriate set value. it can. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

The feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used set value each time the variable display is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. The set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed a predetermined number of times of the variable display or may be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the broadcast image 182SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being performed by reading.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-45 to 10-47, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module common to both when the winning random number value determination is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the above), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced. Further, as in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature section 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, a mode in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 182SG of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature portion 182SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

FIG. 10-62 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (182SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (182SGS271; Y), it is associated with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags stored in the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (182SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". 1 Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the special figure hold storage is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", and the first special figure hold storage is stored. Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-2", and the buffer number "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage is shifted. The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not in the on state (off state) in the 182SGS271 (182SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is in the on state (182SGS273). .. If the second variation start command reception flag is not on (182SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is completed, and if the second variation start command reception flag is on (182SGS273; Y), the start prize is awarded. The various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the time reception command buffer are shifted upward by one buffer number (182SGS274). ). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". 2 Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the special figure hold storage is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", and the second special figure hold storage is stored. Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the buffer number "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage is shifted. The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 182SGS272 or 182SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads and stores the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (182SGS275). In the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern designation command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in response to the reception of the variation pattern designation command, and is deleted at the end of the variable display. The variation pattern specification command may be deleted according to the reading.

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command or variation pattern designation command) (182SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do. In the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 8, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area in response to the reception of the display result designation command, and at the end of the variable display. It will be erased. The display result specification command may be deleted according to the reading.

In the feature unit 125SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the 7th variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a decoration in which three symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" as stop symbols. Determine the combination of symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the eighth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, combine decorative symbols in which three symbols are even numbers as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided.

Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the ninth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, different odd or even numbers such as "135" and "246" as stop symbols. The combination of (small hit symbols) is determined.

Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, if the received variation pattern specification command is a non-reach deviation variation pattern. If the combination of the three symbols excluding the small hit symbols such as "136" and "275" as the stop symbols is irregular, and the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach or out of super reach, for example, stop. As a symbol, a combination of out-of-reach such as "121" and "767" is determined.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-63, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the time saving loss A, the effect control CPU 120 is set to each “medium” decorative symbol. A combination of out-of-reach including the first chance symbol, which is not displayed in the display area 5C in the normal variable display, is determined. When the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the time saving loss B, the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium" in the normal variable display. Determine the out-of-reach combination that includes the second chance symbol that never happens.

When the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the time saving loss C, the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium" in the normal variable display. Determine the out-of-reach combination that includes the never-ending third chance symbol. When the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the time saving loss D, the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium" in the normal variable display. Determine the out-of-reach combination that includes the never-ending 4th chance symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 10-36, at least a part of the first chance symbol, the second chance symbol, the third chance symbol, and the fourth chance symbol are different from each other. Specifically, the upper part of each chance symbol is composed of an image of a common character, and the lower part is composed of a common message display unit (the message "Chance!" Is displayed in this feature unit 182SG). On the other hand, the display color of the message display unit is different according to each chance symbol.

For example, the message display of the first chance symbol is displayed in white, the message display portion of the second chance symbol is displayed in blue, the message display portion of the third chance symbol is displayed in green, and the message display portion of the fourth chance symbol is displayed in red. ..

Therefore, in this feature unit 182SG, when the variable display result is out of time, the player changes the color of the lower part (message display unit) of the chance symbol displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. By recognizing, it is possible to recognize the number of time reduction controls in the high base state (low accuracy high base state).

It should be noted that the feature unit 182SG exemplifies a form in which the player is notified of the number of time reduction controls in the high base state (low accuracy high base state) by the chance symbol displayed when the variable display result is out of time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the ratio of which chance symbol is displayed differs depending on the number of time reduction controls in the high base state (low accuracy high base state). You may do so. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the number of time reduction controls in the high base state (low accuracy high base state) according to which chance symbol is displayed. Can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 10-62, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern to be executed is a super reach variation pattern (step 182SGS277). When the variable display variation pattern to be executed is the super reach variation pattern, the cut-in effect execution determination process for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect ( After executing step 182SGS278), the process proceeds to step 182SGS280. If the variable display variation pattern to be executed is a normal reach or non-reach variation pattern (step 182SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS280 without executing the cut-in effect determination process.

In the 182SGS280, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command and the variable display result. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (182SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (182SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 182SG, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of different decorative symbols according to the variable display result even if the variable pattern designation command is the same (although the variable pattern is out of super reach). , The case where the variable display result is out of time and the case where the variable display result is out of time) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is dedicated to the case where the variable display result is out of time saving. When the variable display can be executed by the variable pattern, the variable display specification command may be controlled so that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed by the variable pattern corresponding to one-to-one.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (182SGS283). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (182SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (182 SGS285), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-64 is an example of a flowchart executed by the effect control CPU 120 as the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-62. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a set value (step 182 SGS301), and determines whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (step 182 SGS302).

When the specified setting value is any of 1 to 3 (step 182SGS302; Y), whether or not the cut-in effect is executed based on the specified setting value being any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result. And the effect pattern is determined (step 182SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (A), when the variable display result is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and a rate of 30%. Decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-1 at 50%, decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. Is determined, and the execution of the cut-in effect pattern in pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and 45%. The cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is decided to be executed at the ratio of, and the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 is decided to be executed at the ratio of 10%, and the cut-in effect pattern pattern is decided at the ratio of 5%. Decide to run on CI-4.

If the variable display result is out of alignment, 55% of the cases determine non-execution of the cut-in effect, and 35% determine the execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-1. The execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is decided by the ratio, the execution by the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 is decided by the ratio of 0%, and the cut-in effect pattern pattern CI is decided by the ratio of 0%. Decide to run at -4.

Then, when the variable display result is out of time, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the execution of the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-1 is determined at a rate of 35%. The percentage of the cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is decided to be executed, the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 is decided to be executed at the rate of 0%, and the cut-in effect pattern is executed at the rate of 0%. Determine the execution in pattern CI-4.

When the specified setting value is any of 4 to 6 (step 182SGS302; N), the cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the specified setting value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display result. (Step 182 SGS304).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B), when the variable display result is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and a rate of 30%. Decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-1 at 50%, decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. Is determined, and the execution of the cut-in effect pattern in pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and 45%. The cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is decided to be executed at the ratio of, and the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 is decided to be executed at the ratio of 10%, and the cut-in effect pattern pattern is decided at the ratio of 5%. Decide to run on CI-4.

If the variable display result is out of alignment, 59% of the cases determine non-execution of the cut-in effect, and 30% determine the execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-1. The execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is decided by the ratio, the execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 is decided by the ratio of 1%, and the cut-in effect pattern pattern CI is determined by the ratio of 0%. Decide to run at -4.

Then, when the variable display result is out of time, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-1 is determined at a rate of 30%. The percentage of the cut-in effect pattern CI-2 is decided to be executed, the cut-in effect pattern CI-3 is decided to be executed at the rate of 0%, and the cut-in effect pattern is executed at the rate of 0%. Determine the execution in pattern CI-4.

As shown in FIGS. 10-66 and 10-70, the cut-in effect in the feature unit 182SG displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach α and the super reach β. Then, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-70, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 182SG005w together with the blue effect, and the effect pattern is If the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 182SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5, and if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 182SG005y is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 182SG005z together with the rainbow-colored effect.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 10-65 and 10-66, the feature unit 182SG does not execute the cut-in effect when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α or the super reach β. In the case, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is low, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2, the cut. When the in-effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order in which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4 (cut). Expectation of big hit in in-production: Non-execution <Pattern CI-1 <Pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the jackpot C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-65, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 to 3, the variable display result is a big hit when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 ( When it is confirmed that the jackpot is A to C), but the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. Even so, the variable display result may be out of order. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, when the reach effect of the super reach α or the super reach β is executed in the feature unit 182SG, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order. It is confirmed that the set value set in is any of 4 to 6.

That is, in the feature unit 182SG, when the cut-in effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach α or the super reach β, it depends on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. Because the jackpot expectations are different, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach α or Super Reach β and which effect pattern the cut-in effect is executed in. It is possible to make it.

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is the big hit and the big hit type is the big hit C, so that the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-4. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for being executed. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, which has the highest expectation of a big hit next to the pattern CI-3, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 because the variable display result is out of order. Since it is confirmed that the value is one of 4 to 6, the player is disappointed because the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order. Not only can the risk of a decrease be reduced, but the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6, which can evoke the player's willingness to continue the game.

In FIG. 10-64, after the execution of step 182SGS303 or step 182SGS304, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (step 182SGS305). When it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (step 182 SGS305; N), the cut-in effect determination process is finished, and when it is decided to execute the cut-in effect (step 182 SGS305; Y), the determined cut-in effect effect is produced. The pattern is stored (step 182SGS306), a value corresponding to the period up to the start timing of the cut-in effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect (step 182SGS307), and the cut-in effect determination process is completed.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table. The cut-in effect may be executed by controlling 9 etc.).

10-67 and 10-68 are examples of flowcharts executed by the effect control CPU 120 as a special figure hit waiting process shown in FIG. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit right-handed notification effect process timer, which will be described later, is operating (step 182SGS300). When the hit right-handed notification effect process timer is not operating (step 182SGS300; N), it is determined whether or not the effect process timer is operating during the symbol determination period described later (step 182SGS301).

When the effect process timer does not output during the operation of the symbol confirmation period (step 182SGS301; N), the symbol confirmation period is specified from the received symbol confirmation command (step 182SGS302). It is determined whether or not the specified symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds (step 182SGS304). When the specified symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds (step 182SGS304; Y), the process table of the effect during symbol determination corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is selected (step 182SGS305). Step 182 SGS 309 proceeds.

Further, when the specified symbol determination period is not 0.5 seconds (step 182SGS304; N), it is further determined whether or not the specified symbol determination period is 20 seconds (step 182SGS306). When the specified symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds (step 182SGS306; Y), the process table of the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds and the symbol confirmation effect (right-handed notification effect) according to the type of time reduction is displayed. Select (step 182SGS307) and proceed to step 182SGS309. Then, when the specified symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds (step 182SGS306; N), the process table of the symbol confirmation effect (time reduction number of times additional notification effect) corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds is selected. (Step 182SGS308), the process proceeds to step 182SGS309.

In step 182SGS309, the effect control CPU 120 starts the symbol-determining effect process timer corresponding to each symbol-determining effect (step 182SGS309).

In the effect process table during each symbol determination, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. The sound control execution data and the like for controlling the above are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is used as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R, etc. as production parts)) is executed (182SGS310). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the right-handed notification effect by referring to the effect process data during the symbol determination (step 182 SGS311). When it is not the start timing of the right-handed notification effect (step 182SGS311; N), the waiting process for hitting the special figure is finished, and when it is the start timing of the right-handed notification effect, that is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the variable display result. When the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the effect process data (step 182SGS311; Y) in the case of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss of time reduction, the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H is started to light (step). 182SGS312), the waiting process for hitting a special figure is completed.

When the effect processing timer is operating during the symbol determination period in step 182SGS301 (step 182SGS301; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the effect process timer during the symbol determination period by -1 (step 182SGS313). It is determined whether or not the effect process timer has timed out during the symbol determination period (step 182SGS314). When the effect processing timer is not timer-out during the symbol confirmation period (step 182SGS314; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the effect process timer during the symbol determination period (step 182SGS315). End the waiting process for each figure.

When the effect process timer is timered out during the symbol confirmation period (step 182SGS314; N), it is determined whether or not the effect timer during the symbol confirmation period is the effect process timer during the final symbol confirmation period. (Step 182 SGS 316). When the effect timer during the symbol determination period out of the timer is not the effect process timer during the last symbol determination period (step 182SGS316; N), the process data is switched (step 182SGS317). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the effect process timer during the next symbol determination period (step 182SGS318), controls the effect device according to the contents of the next process data (step 182SGS319), and waits for the special figure. To finish.

Further, when the effect timer during the symbol confirmation period out of the timer is the effect process timer during the last symbol confirmation period (step 182SGS316; Y), the sixth variable display result designation command, the seventh variable display result designation command, and the seventh variable display result designation command. It is determined whether or not any of the 8 variable display result designation command and the 9th variable display result designation command is received (step 182SGS320). When none of the 6th variable display result specification command, the 7th variable display result specification command, the 8th variable display result specification command, and the 9th variable display result specification command is received (step 182SGS320; N), the effect control The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 182SGS321), and the special figure hit waiting process is terminated.

Further, when any of the 6th variable display result designation command, the 7th variable display result designation command, the 8th variable display result designation command, and the 9th variable display result designation command is received (step 182SGS320; Y), The effect control CPU 120
Select the process table of the right-handed hit notification effect for prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the right game area 182SG002R based on the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state (step). 182SGS341).

The right-handed notification effect process table for hitting is output from display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data and the like for controlling sound are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is used as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R, etc. as production parts)) is executed (182SGS343). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13, and the waiting process for hitting the special figure is completed.

When the hit right-handed notification effect process timer is operating in step 182SGS300 (step 182SGS300; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the hit right-handed notification effect process timer by -1 (step 182SG344). , It is determined whether or not the right-handed notification effect process timer has timed out (step 182SGS345).

When the hit right-handed notification effect process timer is not timer-out (step 182SGS345; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the hit right-handed notification effect process timer (step 182SGS346). End the waiting process for each figure. When the hit right-handed notification effect process timer is timered out (step 182SGS345; Y), whether or not the hit right-handed notification effect process timer that has been timered out is the last hit right-handed notification effect process timer. Is determined (step 182 SGS347).

When the timer-out hit right-handed notification effect process timer is the last hit right-handed notification effect process timer (step 182SGS347; Y), the process proceeds to step 182SGS350, and the timer-out hit right-handed notification effect process timer is the last. When it is not the hit right-handed notification effect process timer (step 182SGWS347; N), the process data is switched (step 182SGS348). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the effect process timer during the next symbol determination period (step 182 SGS349), controls the effect device according to the contents of the next process data, and proceeds to step 182 SGS350.

Then, in step 182SGS350, the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether or not the received hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game (step 182SGS350), and the received hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (step 182 SGS352). When the received hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game (step 182SGS352; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot (step 182SGS353). End the hit waiting process. When the received hit start designation command specifies the start of the small hit game (step 182SGS352; N), the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 182SGS354). , Ends the waiting process for hitting the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 10-69 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the special figure hit waiting process as described above and the variable display result becomes a big hit, it is 0 from the end timing of the variable display. .During the symbol confirmation period over 5 seconds, the symbol confirmation effect is executed. Then, from the timing when the symbol determination period ends, the jackpot game state is controlled, and the hit right-handed notification effect is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-69 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the symbol fixing effect is executed during the symbol fixing period of 0.5 seconds from the end timing of the variable display. .. Then, when the hold memory exists, the next variable display is started from the end timing of the symbol-determining effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-69 (C), when the variable display result is out of time reduction when the game state is the non-time reduction state (normal state, low accuracy low base state), the variable display is displayed. During the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds from the end timing, a right-handed notification effect based on the time saving loss is executed as a symbol confirmation effect. Then, when the hold storage exists, the next variable display (variable display of the time reduction control target) is started from the end timing of the right-handed notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-69 (D), when the variable display is out of time when the game state is the time saving state (low accuracy high base state), 10 seconds from the end timing of the variable display. During the symbol confirmation period, the notification effect is executed by adding a reduced number of times as the effect during the symbol confirmation. Then, when the hold storage exists, the next variable display (variable display of the time reduction control target) is started from the end timing of the time reduction number addition notification effect.

As the effect during symbol determination for 0.5 seconds in the feature unit 182SG, for example, an image display for notifying that the variable display is completed in the image display device 5 and a variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed. Either sound output for notifying that the game has ended, light emission for notifying that the variable display on the game effect lamp 9 has ended, or the like may be executed, or these images may be displayed, sound output, or light emitted. It may be a period of simply waiting without executing the effect control such as.

Next, the effect mode of the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 182SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-70 to 10-75.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-70 (A) to 10-70 (C), when the reach effect is started, the image display device 5 starts the reach effect of the super reach α or the super reach β.

As described above, when the execution of the cut-in effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the image of the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach, and the player Is prompted to operate the push button 31B. Then, based on the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ending, FIGS. 10-70 (E) to 10 As shown in −70 (H), the image display device 5 displays the effect and the cut-in image corresponding to each effect pattern.

If the variable display result is out of alignment after the execution period of the cut-in effect is completed, the effect result of the reach effect is out of alignment as shown in FIGS. 10-71 (A) to 10-71 (D). After being notified that there is, the decorative symbol stops at the combination of being out of alignment, and the variable display ends. At this time, if the hold storage exists, the next variable display is started 0.5 seconds after the end of the variable display.

If the variable display result is a big hit after the cut-in effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-71 (A) and 10-71 (E) to 10-71 (G). After being notified that the result of the reach effect is a big hit, the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating the big hit, and the variable display ends. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed from the end of the variable display, the jackpot game state is controlled and the right-handed hit notification effect for hitting is started. At this time, the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H is also started to light.

Further, when the variable display is a variable display of "out of time reduction" in the normal state (non-time reduction time), as shown in FIGS. 10-72 (A) to 10-72 (D), a cut-in effect is produced. After the execution period of is completed, it is notified that the result of the reach effect is out of order, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating the out of order. At this time, the decorative pattern is not completely stopped and is slightly oscillating.

Then, in the "middle" symbol display area 5C of the decorative symbol, a silhouette of a chance symbol (see FIGS. 10-63) indicating that the decorative symbol is out of time is displayed instead of the swinging decorative symbol. At this time, the player can recognize that the variable display result is out of time by visually recognizing the silhouette. Further, by displaying the silhouette, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the type of time-saving loss is any of time-saving loss A to time-saving loss D.

After the silhouette display period is over, as shown in FIGS. 10-72 (E) to 10-72 (H), chance symbols are displayed in place of the silhouette according to the type of loss with time reduction, and the display is variable. Is finished.

Next, after the variable display is completed, as shown in FIGS. 10-73 (A) to 10-73 (D), a right-handed notification effect as a symbol determination effect is executed for 20 seconds. As the right-handed notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 10-73 (A), a mode transition effect for notifying that the image display device 5 is controlled to a time saving state (described as a time saving mode in the figure) is provided. Will be executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-73 (B) and 10-73 (C), after the image display device 5 is notified of the number of time reduction controls executed in the time reduction state, the player is given a right game. An image prompting the game ball toward the area 182SG002R is displayed.

From the start timing of the right-handed notification effect, the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H is also started to light.

Further, when the variable display is a variable display of "out of time reduction" in the time reduction state, the execution period of the cut-in effect ends as shown in FIGS. 10-74 (A) to 10-74 (D). After that, it is notified that the result of the reach effect is out of order, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating the out of place. At this time, the decorative pattern is not completely stopped and is slightly oscillating.

Then, in the "middle" symbol display area 5C of the decorative symbol, a silhouette of a chance symbol (see FIGS. 10-63) indicating that the decorative symbol is out of time is displayed instead of the swinging decorative symbol. At this time, the player can recognize that the variable display result is out of time by visually recognizing the silhouette. Further, by displaying the silhouette, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the type of time-saving loss is any of time-saving loss A to time-saving loss D.

After the silhouette display period is over, as shown in FIGS. 10-74 (E) to 10-74 (H), chance symbols are displayed in place of the silhouettes according to the type of loss with time reduction, and the display is variable. Is finished.

Next, after the variable display is completed, as shown in FIGS. 10-75 (A) to 10-75 (D), a time saving number-added notification effect is executed as a symbol determination effect for 10 seconds. As the additional time reduction notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 10-75 (A), the remaining time reduction control number is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-75 (B) and 10-75 (C), the value of the remaining time reduction control number is added from the original number, and finally the time reduction number is increased until the next big hit game. It is notified that it will continue (as shown in FIG. 10-75 (C), the number of remaining time reductions is displayed as "∞ (infinite)" times).

After that, the next variable display is started if the hold storage exists according to the end of the additional notification effect by the number of time reductions.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 182SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-19, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the variable special figure is the first special symbol. If, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time, regardless of the set value, and if the variable special figure is the second special symbol, 65317 to 65425 regardless of the set value. The range of is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. That is, since the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time reduction is the same regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased by the set value.

In addition, as the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value, regardless of which set value is set, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the time saving loss reference value is 65317 to 65535. When the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425, which is the reference value for the time reduction, is set, so that the processing load related to the determination of displaying the time reduction deviation symbol as the variable display result is reduced. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, as a result of the variable display, a time-saving missed symbol is generated. Since the displayed ratios are different, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Furthermore, in both the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display result is the out-of-time symbol with a time reduction regardless of the set value. Is displayed in common (about 1/300 in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, about 1/600 in the variable display of the 2nd special symbol), so the gambling property depends on the set value. It is possible to prevent it from becoming excessively high.

Then, in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the continuous numerical range from the common time-saving loss reference value 65317 is the time-saving loss determination value. It is set in the numerical range. In particular, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the range from 65317 to 65535 is set to the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value regardless of the set value, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In the case of executing, since the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value regardless of the set value, the time saving loss symbol is displayed as a variable display result. The processing load related to judgment can be further reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit reference value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value. Is set in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the range of the small hit reference value 32767 to 33421 is small regardless of the set value. Since it is set in the numerical range of the hit judgment value, the processing load related to the judgment of displaying the small hit symbol as the variable display result can be reduced.

Further, in this feature unit 182SG, the time reduction state is controlled by taking the opportunity of the time reduction loss, that is, the game state is shortened from the normal state without going through the big hit game state or the small hit game state in which the big winning opening is opened and closed. Since the state is changed, the player's unexpectedness can be enhanced and the game interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the feature unit 182SG exemplifies a mode in which the gaming state can be controlled to the time saving state when the out-of-time symbol is displayed as the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the small hit symbol may be displayed as a variable display result, and the game state may be controlled to a shorter time state after the small hit game is completed. In this way, when the game state can be controlled to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed when the small hit symbol is displayed as the variable display result, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value and the judgment of the time saving deviation are determined. The numerical range of the value may be a numerical range of 1 continuous from a specific reference value. By doing so, it is possible to further reduce the processing load related to the determination that the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a time saving loss or a small hit.

Further, the feature unit 182SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot symbol is displayed as a variable display result. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to control the small hit game state when a small hit is displayed as a variable display result, and the game ball enters a specific area during the small hit game state ( For example, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state when it passes through a jackpot game start switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7.

When the present invention is applied to such a pachinko gaming machine, as described above, the numerical range of the small hit determination value and the numerical range of the determination value of the time saving loss are continuously set to a numerical value of 1 from a specific reference value. In addition to the range, when the game ball enters a specific area during the small hit game state, the game ball is controlled to the large hit game state after the end of the small hit game, while the game ball enters the specific area during the small hit game state. If the player does not enter, the game state may be controlled to a time saving state after the small hit game is completed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-46, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 182SG, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set in step 182SGS559a, and when the probability variation flag is set. Is already controlled to the probabilistic state (high probability high base state) by executing the process of step 182SGS565 and not executing the determination of whether or not the variable display result is out of time saving in step 182SGS559b. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered by being controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy and high base state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), when the variable display result is out of time reduction in the normal state, the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds, but the variable display result is out of time reduction in the time reduction state. In this case, since the symbol determination period is 10 seconds, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed when the variable display result is out of alignment in the time saving state.

In the present feature section 182SG, when the variable display result is out of time reduction in the normal state, the pattern determination period is longer than in the case where the variable display result is out of time reduction in the time saving state. Is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of time saving in the time saving state, the symbol determination period may be longer than in the case where the variable display result is out of time saving in the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to extend the period until the variable display result becomes a big hit, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of prize balls paid out per unit time becomes excessively large.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), when the variable display result is out of order, the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, but when the variable display result is out of time, the symbol confirmation period is set. Since it is 10 seconds or 20 seconds, if the variable display result is out of time, it is possible to secure a period for executing an effect such as notifying that the time is controlled to the time reduction state in the symbol confirmation period. You can improve the game fun.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds when the variable display result is a big hit in the feature unit 182SG, and from the timing when the symbol confirmation period ends, The right-handed hit notification effect for hitting is executed for 5 seconds on the image display device 5 or the like. That is, in the case of being controlled to the jackpot game state, the player recognizes that the game ball is launched toward the right game area 182SG002R from an earlier timing than in the case of being controlled to the time reduction state triggered by the loss of time reduction. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the case of being controlled to the time saving state triggered by the time saving loss, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 and 10-69, the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect process timer during the symbol determination period. That is, since the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H starts to light from the start timing of the right-handed notification effect for 20 seconds, the right-handed game area 182SG002R is given to the player by lighting the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H and the right-handed notification effect. Since it is possible to encourage the launch of the game ball toward the target, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-61, by repeating the alternating lighting of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, it is notified that the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is being executed. 4 symbols 182SG005J are provided, and if the variable display result is out of order, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are finally turned off, and if the variable display result is out of time, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower part are turned off. Since both of the symbols 079SG005Jb are finally turned on, the player can easily recognize whether the variable display result is out of sync or out of time depending on the mode of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb. It is possible.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG, when the CPU 103 executes the information output process, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 to 10-43, the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal, the jackpot 3 signal, the symbol confirmation signal, and the prize ball signal , Out signals, security signals, etc. can be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In particular, by outputting the big hit 3 signal to the outside, it is possible to grasp the number of times controlled to the time saving state triggered by the time saving loss by the management computer or the like of the game hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in this feature unit 182SG, as shown in FIG. 10-25, when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), the variable display result is out of time and in the time saving state (high base state). Since the number of times the time saving control is executed differs depending on whether the variable display result is out of time saving at a certain time, the player should pay attention to the gaming state when the variable display result is out of time saving. And can improve the game entertainment. In particular, in this feature unit 182SG, when the variable display result is out of time when the game state is in the time saving state, the time saving control is continued until the variable display result becomes a big hit, so that the gaming state is in the time saving state. When this is the case, the player's expectation that the variable display result will be out of time can be increased, and the game interest can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-24, as the time saving loss in the feature unit 182SG, there are a total of four time saving loss types A to time saving loss D in which the number of times the time saving control is executed is different. Therefore, when the variable display result is out of time saving, the player can be focused on the type of out of time saving, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Although the feature portion 182SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be changed or added within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 182SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-17 to 10-20, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range in which the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result can be taken. Of these, the range from 65317 to 65535 or 65425, which is the reference value for the time-saving loss, is set to the common numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value, while the game state is the probable change state, the time-saving loss is lost. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 182SG- As shown in FIGS. 10-76 and 10-77 as No. 1, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 65317, which is the reference value for loss of time reduction, to a predetermined value is the common numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction. By setting to, it may be possible to win the prize with a short time.

In particular, in the present modification 182SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 10-76 and 10-77, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is the jackpot reference regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the probability variation state. A continuous numerical range from the value 1020 (65317 to 65535, which is the reference value for the deviation with time reduction when the fluctuation special symbol is the first special symbol, and the reference value for loss with time reduction when the fluctuation special symbol is the second special symbol. Since it is set in the numerical range of 65317 to 65425), the processing load when determining the variable display result as a big hit can be reduced. Further, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the numerical range of the judgment value of the time saving loss is all the same continuous numerical value from the time saving loss reference value 65317. Since the range is set, the processing load can be reduced when the variable display result is determined to be out of time.

Furthermore, as a form in which it is possible to win a time-saving loss even when the game state is in a probable change state (the variable display result can be determined as "time-saving loss"), the variable special figure is the first special symbol. Only in certain cases, it may be possible to win the prize in the probable change state. In this form, a common display result determination table is used when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, depending on whether the variable special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the variable special figure is used. When it is determined that the variable display result is "out of time reduction" when the second special symbol is used, the variable display result may be determined to be "out of time".

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-78, after the execution of step 1182SG559 of the special symbol normal processing (after it is determined that the variable display result is neither a big hit nor a small hit), the CPU 103 uses the variable special symbol second. If it is a special symbol, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is out of time reduction (step 182SGS559b). If the variable display result is not out of time saving, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" (step 182SGS559b; N), the process proceeds to step 182SGS565, and if the variable display result is out of time saving (step 182SGS559b; Y). ) Determines whether or not the probability change flag is set, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state (step 182SGS559g).

When the probability change flag is not set (step 182SGS559g; Y), the processes of steps 182SGS559c to 182SGS559f are executed in the same manner as in the feature unit 182SG to proceed to step 182SGS565, and when the probability change flag is set (step 182SGS559g; Y) may proceed to step 182SGS565 without executing the processes of steps 182SGS559c to 182SGS559f.

By doing so, when the state is already controlled to the probable change state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the new control to the time saving state instead of the probable change state.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-73, when the variable display result is out of time when the game state is the normal state, the symbol determination period (right-handed notification effect) is started. Although the embodiment in which the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H is started to light from the timing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is usually as shown in FIG. 10-79 as a modified example 182SG-2. If the variable display result is out of time in the state, the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H may be started to light from the end timing of the symbol determination period (right-handed notification effect). In this way, by starting the lighting of the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H from the end timing of the right-handed notification effect, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner when to start firing the game ball toward the right game area 182SG002R. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the present modification 182SG-2, a mode in which the right-handed notification lamp 182SG009H is started to light from the end timing of the right-handed notification effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the right-handed notification lamp is not limited to this. The timing for starting the lighting of the notification lamp 182SG009H may be any timing as long as it is after the end timing of the right-handed notification effect.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 and 10-42, the big hit 3 signals are transmitted for 10 seconds or 20 seconds from the variable display stop timing of the time saving loss to the end timing of the symbol confirmation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 10-80 as a modified example 182SG-3, the jackpot 3 signal is a variable display with a time reduction and a loss. It may be a signal that is continuously output from the stop timing or the end timing of the symbol determination period of the variable display of the time reduction deviation to the end timing of the time reduction state (high base state) based on the time reduction deviation.

Further, in the feature unit 182SG, a set value of any of 1 to 6 can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a mode in which the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the set set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not set a set value, that is, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state may not change according to the set value. ..

Further, in the feature unit 182SG, a small hit symbol can be displayed as a variable display result of the first special symbol or a variable display result of the second special symbol (based on the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can be controlled to a small hit game state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and either the variable display result of the first special symbol or the variable display result of the second special symbol The small hit symbol may be displayed by only one of them, or the small hit symbol may not be displayed in either the variable display result of the first special symbol or the variable display result of the second special symbol. Good.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A predetermined result and a specific result can be displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and based on the display of the specific result, the player is in an advantageous state. It ’s a controllable game machine,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value in which the ratio of displaying the specific result is different, and
Random value generation means that can generate random values to judge the display result of variable display,
A determination means capable of determining the display result of the variable display based on the random number value generated by the random number value generation means,
A variable display means capable of executing variable display based on the determination result of the determination means, and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the display result of the variable display as the specific result, and is different from the advantageous state based on the display of the predetermined result as the display result of the variable display. A state control means that can control a state and a special state in which the variable display start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state.
With
As the determination value for the determination means to determine the display result of the variable display, there are a predetermined determination value corresponding to the predetermined result and a specific determination value corresponding to the specific result.
The number of the specific judgment values varies depending on the set value.
The specific determination value is set in a common numerical range common to any of the plurality of set values.
The specific determination value of the advantageous set value is set in the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set as the specific determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a specific numerical range.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value.
As the predetermined determination value, there are a first identification information correspondence predetermined determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and a second identification information correspondence predetermined determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information.
The number of predetermined determination values corresponding to the second identification information is different from the number of predetermined determination values corresponding to the first identification information.
The number of the predetermined determination values corresponding to the first identification information is the same for any of the plurality of set values.
The number of predetermined determination values corresponding to the second identification information is the same for any of the plurality of set values.
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the determination means can determine that the display result of the variable display is the predetermined result by using the predetermined determination value corresponding to the first identification information, and the second identification. When executing the variable display of information, it is possible to determine that the display result of the variable display is the predetermined result by using the predetermined determination value corresponding to the second identification information.
The predetermined determination value corresponding to the first identification information is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value different from the first reference value in any of the plurality of set values, and is the specific numerical range. It is set in a numerical range different from
The second identification information correspondence predetermined determination value is a numerical range common to the first identification information correspondence predetermined determination value as a continuous numerical range from the second reference value regardless of any of the plurality of setting values. It is a numerical range including, and is set to a numerical range different from the specific numerical range.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images